You are on page 1of 674

EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications

EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications


EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications
Laboratory
Laboratory
Dr. Dennis Silage
Dr. Dennis Silage
silage@temple.edu
silage@temple.edu
Course syllabus Course syllabus
Course textbooks Course textbooks
Course grades Course grades
Course objectives Course objectives
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
Course Course
textbook textbook
Available as: Available as:
bound bound hardcopy hardcopy
pdf pdf file file
Kindle Kindle download download
YouTube YouTube video video
blog blog session session
twitter twitter stream stream
text message text message
Morse code Morse code .wav file .wav file
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
Course Course
textbook textbook
only only
kidding! kidding!
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
Course textbooks Course textbooks
Communication Communication
Systems Systems provides provides
the theoretical the theoretical
basis basis
Digital Digital
Communication Communication
Systems Systems provides provides
simulations for simulations for
insight and insight and
experiential laboratories experiential laboratories
in EE4513 in EE4513
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
Course Course
syllabus syllabus
All course All course
materials materials
are also are also
available on available on
Blackboard Blackboard
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
In In- -class problems and discussions form the basis for the class problems and discussions form the basis for the
examinations examinations
SNAP quizzes (weekly, 15 minutes, 25%) and SNAP quizzes (weekly, 15 minutes, 25%) and
examinations (three, hour exams, 35% and a two hour examinations (three, hour exams, 35% and a two hour
final exam, 40%) are benchmarks of performance final exam, 40%) are benchmarks of performance
Blackboard Blackboard is used for the is used for the
course and laboratory course and laboratory
documents and to documents and to
communicate assignments communicate assignments
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink modeling of communication modeling of communication
systems in systems in- -class augments the text description class augments the text description
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink modeling in EE4513 Analog and modeling in EE4513 Analog and
Digital Communications Laboratory Digital Communications Laboratory
In In- -class discussions, class discussions,
simulation studies and simulation studies and
problem solutions problem solutions
Temple Technical Institute Temple Technical Institute
Analog Communications Analog Communications
Laboratory 1962 Laboratory 1962
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
This course is the This course is the application application of of electrotechnology electrotechnology
Professional career path in Professional career path in digital data communications digital data communications
Course sequence continues in EE4542 Course sequence continues in EE4542
Telecommunication Engineering Telecommunication Engineering
Read the assigned text Read the assigned text
portions and review your portions and review your
notes before class notes before class
Weekly closed Weekly closed- -book book
but open notes but open notes SNAP SNAP
quizzes quizzes to assess to assess
performance performance
Edwin and Marian Armstrong Edwin and Marian Armstrong
with a with a portable radio portable radio 1923 1923
SNAP SNAP stands for stands for Students Students Note Note- -taking Achieves taking Achieves
Performance Performance and the 15 minute quizzes are and the 15 minute quizzes are open open- -notes notes
but but closed text book closed text book. .
Your organized notes are a compilation of reading the Your organized notes are a compilation of reading the
text and thinking text and thinking
about the concepts about the concepts
and are an and are an aid to aid to
learning learning. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
The The SNAP SNAP concept relates to the learning process concept relates to the learning process
expressed in the Chinese proverb: expressed in the Chinese proverb:
I hear and I forget, I hear and I forget,
I see and I remember, I see and I remember,
I do and I understand. I do and I understand.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
I hear and I forget, I hear and I forget, Listening to the lecture Listening to the lecture
I see and I remember, I see and I remember, Reading the textbook Reading the textbook
I do and I understand. I do and I understand. Compiling the notes Compiling the notes
The notes are to be The notes are to be
handwritten handwritten to insure to insure
that the process works that the process works
for you. No for you. No xerox xerox copies copies
or or electronic versions electronic versions
or textbooks are or textbooks are
permitted for use permitted for use
during the SNAP quiz. during the SNAP quiz.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
Leonardo Da Vinci and
his notebooks
The 15 minute SNAP quizzes are The 15 minute SNAP quizzes are
simple calculations and unit simple calculations and unit
conversions (calculators are conversions (calculators are
permitted) from formulas in your permitted) from formulas in your
notes and conceptual answers notes and conceptual answers
to posed questions to assess to posed questions to assess
your understanding of the basic your understanding of the basic
concepts. concepts.
The SNAP quiz is the assessment The SNAP quiz is the assessment
of your preparation and organizes of your preparation and organizes
your thoughts as part of the your thoughts as part of the
engineering method engineering method (not that (not that
shown here!). shown here!).
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
Components of a Communication Components of a Communication
System System
Pages 1 Pages 1- -5 5
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Modulation Modulation (partial definition): (partial definition):
3 3: : to vary the amplitude, frequency, or phase of (a to vary the amplitude, frequency, or phase of (a
carrier wave or a light wave) for the transmission carrier wave or a light wave) for the transmission
of information (as by radio) of information (as by radio)
Carrier Carrier (partial definition): (partial definition):
2: an electromagnetic wave or alternating current whose 2: an electromagnetic wave or alternating current whose
modulations are used as communications signals (as modulations are used as communications signals (as
in radio, telephonic, or telegraphic transmissions in radio, telephonic, or telegraphic transmissions
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Analog modulation: Analog modulation:
continuous continuous
information such as information such as
speech speech or or video video
encoded as an encoded as an
amplitude amplitude
Digital modulation: Digital modulation:
discrete information discrete information
such as such as binary data binary data
encoded as encoded as
a a frequency shift frequency shift
or or
a a phase shift phase shift
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Source Source
Transmitter Transmitter
User User
Analog amplitude modulation (AM) Analog amplitude modulation (AM)
MS Figure 1.16 MS Figure 1.16
Channel Channel
with noise with noise
Receiver Receiver
Simulink Simulink subsystems subsystems
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Analog amplitude modulation (AM) Analog amplitude modulation (AM)
MS Figure 1.16 MS Figure 1.16
Coherent Coherent
demodulation demodulation
Channel Channel
with noise with noise
Source Source
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
User User
Simulink Simulink subsystems subsystems
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Channel Channel
with noise with noise
Analog amplitude modulation (AM) Analog amplitude modulation (AM)
MS Figure 1.20 MS Figure 1.20
Non Non- -coherent demodulation coherent demodulation
Simulink Simulink subsystems subsystems
Source Source
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
User User
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Sinusoidal input and DSB AM Sinusoidal input and DSB AM
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Sinusoidal input and DSB AM Sinusoidal input and DSB AM
Simulink Simulink subsystem subsystem
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
DSB AM temporal signal and power spectrum DSB AM temporal signal and power spectrum
DSB modulated
spectrum
Carrier
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Demodulated DSB AM spectrum Demodulated DSB AM spectrum
Original spectrum
DSB demodulated
spectrum
2 x carrier
frequency
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Digital binary phase shift keying (BPSK) Digital binary phase shift keying (BPSK)
MS Figure 3.12 MS Figure 3.12
Random data source Random data source Bit error rate Bit error rate
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Input binary data, rate Input binary data, rate r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, bit time = 1 kb/sec, bit time T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Output binary data with no noise, note 2 bit delay in output Output binary data with no noise, note 2 bit delay in output
T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Input binary data, rate Input binary data, rate r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, bit time = 1 kb/sec, bit time T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Received signal with significant additive noise Received signal with significant additive noise
Where Where s the signal? s the signal?
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
Input binary data, rate Input binary data, rate r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, bit time = 1 kb/sec, bit time T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Output binary data with Output binary data with bit errors bit errors due to additive noise due to additive noise
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 1
End of Chapter 1
End of Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Communication Simulation
Communication Simulation
Techniques
Techniques
Introduction to Introduction to M MATLAB ATLAB and and
Simulink Simulink
Blocksets Blocksets
Simulation displays Simulation displays
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Simulink Simulink
Library Library
Browser: Browser:
Commonly Commonly
Used Blocks Used Blocks
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Simulink Simulink
Library Library
Browser: Browser:
Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Simulink Simulink
Library Library
Browser: Browser:
Signal Signal
Processing Processing
Blockset Blockset
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Simulink Simulink
Library Library
Browser: Browser:
Simulink Simulink
Extras Extras
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Simulink Library Browser Simulink Library Browser and the model window and the model window
MS Figure 1.2 MS Figure 1.2
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Source parameter block for the Source parameter block for the Random Integer Random Integer
Generator Generator block and the block and the Simulink Simulink model window model window
MS Figure 1.3 MS Figure 1.3
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Configuration parameter window for the Configuration parameter window for the Simulink Simulink
simulation simulation
MS Figure 1.4 MS Figure 1.4
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Sinusoid and half wave rectified sinusoid Sinusoid and half wave rectified sinusoid Simulink Simulink
temporal model temporal model
MS Figure 1.6 MS Figure 1.6
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Sinusoid and half wave rectified sinusoid temporal display Sinusoid and half wave rectified sinusoid temporal display
in the in the Simulink Simulink Figures window Figures window
MS Figure 1.7 MS Figure 1.7
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Half wave rectified sinusoid Half wave rectified sinusoid Simulink Simulink spectral display spectral display
model model
MS Figure 1.8 MS Figure 1.8
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Scope and axis properties parameter windows of the Scope and axis properties parameter windows of the
Spectrum Scope Spectrum Scope block block
MS Figure 1.9 MS Figure 1.9
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Scaled power spectral display of a half wave rectified Scaled power spectral display of a half wave rectified
sinusoid, sinusoid, f f
o o
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 1.10 MS Figure 1.10
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered power Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered power
spectral density display spectral density display
MS Figure 1.11 MS Figure 1.11
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Gaussian noise source and LPF PSD Gaussian noise source and LPF PSD MS Figure 1.12 MS Figure 1.12
Flat PSD Flat PSD
LPF PSD, LPF PSD, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 11.25 kHz = 11.25 kHz
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered
autocorrelation display autocorrelation display
MS Figure 1.13 MS Figure 1.13
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered power Gaussian noise source and lowpass filtered power
autocorrelation display autocorrelation display
MS Figure 1.14 MS Figure 1.14
Uncorrelated Uncorrelated
Correlated Correlated
EE4513 Analog and Digital Communications Laboratory Chapter 1
End of Chapter 1
End of Chapter 1
Communication Simulation
Communication Simulation
Techniques
Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
Why Study Frequency Domain Why Study Frequency Domain
Analysis? Analysis?
Pages 6 Pages 6- -13 13
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Why frequency domain Why frequency domain
analysis? analysis?
Allows simple algebra Allows simple algebra
rather than time rather than time- -domain domain
differential equations differential equations
to be used to be used
Transfer functions can Transfer functions can
be applied to transmitter, be applied to transmitter,
communication channel communication channel
and receiver and receiver
Channel bandwidth, Channel bandwidth,
noise and power are noise and power are
easier to evaluate easier to evaluate
MS Figure 4.2 and Figure 4.3 MS Figure 4.2 and Figure 4.3
500, 1500 and 2500 Hz 500, 1500 and 2500 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Why frequency domain Why frequency domain
analysis? analysis?
A complex signal A complex signal
consisting of the sum of consisting of the sum of
three sinusoids is three sinusoids is
difficult to discern in the difficult to discern in the
temporal domain temporal domain
but easy to identify in the but easy to identify in the
spectral domain spectral domain
MS Figure 4.2 and Figure 4.3 MS Figure 4.2 and Figure 4.3
500, 1500 and 500, 1500 and
2500 Hz 2500 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Butterworth LPF Butterworth LPF
9 pole, 9 pole, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
500 500
Hz Hz
1500 1500
Hz Hz
2500 2500
Hz Hz
MS Fig 4.8 modified MS Fig 4.8 modified
Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, temporal Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, temporal
display display
EX21.mdl EX21.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids
Output after Butterworth LPF Output after Butterworth LPF
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Butterworth LPF Butterworth LPF
9 pole, 9 pole, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Fig 4.8 modified MS Fig 4.8 modified
Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, temporal Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, temporal
display display
Since this is a Since this is a M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink time Simulink time- -based based
simulation simulation, an , an analog low pass filter analog low pass filter is used here is used here
EX21.mdl EX21.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Butterworth LPF Butterworth LPF
9 pole, 9 pole, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
500 500
Hz Hz
1500 1500
Hz Hz
2500 2500
Hz Hz
MS Fig 4.11 modified MS Fig 4.11 modified
Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, spectral Example 2.1 Input sum of three sinusoids, spectral
display display
EX21spectral.mdl EX21spectral.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Input power spectral density of the sum of three sinusoids Input power spectral density of the sum of three sinusoids
Output power spectral density after Butterworth LPF Output power spectral density after Butterworth LPF
Attenuation (decibel dB) Attenuation (decibel dB)
34 dB 34 dB
36 dB 36 dB
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Butterworth Filters Butterworth Filters
Stephen Butterworth was a Stephen Butterworth was a
British British physicist physicist who invented who invented
the the Butterworth filter Butterworth filter, a class , a class
of circuits that are used to of circuits that are used to
filter filter electrical signals. He electrical signals. He
worked for several years worked for several years
at the National Physical at the National Physical
Laboratory (UK), where he did Laboratory (UK), where he did
theoretical and experimental theoretical and experimental
work for the determination of work for the determination of
standards of electrical standards of electrical
inductance and analyzed the inductance and analyzed the
electromagnetic field around submarine cables. electromagnetic field around submarine cables.
1885 1885- -1958 1958
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.2 Example 2.2
10 MHz sinusoid 10 MHz sinusoid
with additive with additive
white Gaussian white Gaussian
noise (AWGN) noise (AWGN)
EX22.mdl EX22.mdl
Communications channel Communications channel
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.2 Example 2.2 Simulink Simulink design window design window
Configure Simulation Simulate Configure Simulation Simulate
EX22.mdl EX22.mdl
T = 0.01 sec T = 0.01 sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.2 Example 2.2 Simulink Simulink design window design window
Configure Simulation Configure Simulation T T
simulation simulation
= 10 = 10
- -8 8
= 10 nsec = 10 nsec
f f
simulation simulation
= 1/ = 1/T T
simulation simulation
= 10 = 10
8 8
= 100 MHz = 100 MHz T T = 0.01 sec = 0.01 sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.2 10 MHz sinusoid with AWGN Example 2.2 10 MHz sinusoid with AWGN
Power spectral density of 10 MHz sinusoid with AWGN Power spectral density of 10 MHz sinusoid with AWGN
10 MHz 10 MHz
Here Here s the signal! s the signal!
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
The Fourier Series The Fourier Series
Pages 13 Pages 13- -38 38
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2

+
0 n o n
n=1
s(t) = X X cos(2 n f t + )
Fourier Series Fourier Series
Jean Jean Baptiste Baptiste Joseph Fourier was Joseph Fourier was
a French mathematician and physicist a French mathematician and physicist
who is best known for initiating the who is best known for initiating the
investigation of Fourier Series and its investigation of Fourier Series and its
application to problems of heat flow. application to problems of heat flow.
The Fourier transform is also named The Fourier transform is also named
in his honor. in his honor.
1768 1768- -1830 1830
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
2 2
0 0 n n n
n n n n
X =a X = a +b
| c | = X / 2 X = | 2 c |
Fourier series coefficients: Fourier series coefficients:
trignometric trignometric a a
n n
b b
n n
polar polar X X
n n
complex complex c c
n n
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink simulation simulation
can provide the magnitude of can provide the magnitude of
the complex Fourier series the complex Fourier series
coefficients for any periodic coefficients for any periodic
waveform waveform
X
o
= c
o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Temporal display Temporal display
of a complex pulse of a complex pulse
as the addition of as the addition of
two periodic pulses two periodic pulses
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified Simulink Simulink design window design window
Configure Simulation Simulate Configure Simulation Simulate
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
T = 4 sec T = 4 sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified Simulink Simulink design window design window
Configure Simulation Configure Simulation f f
simulation simulation
= 1024 Hz = 1024 Hz
T T
simulation simulation
= 1/ = 1/f f
simulation simulation
= 0.976562 msec = 0.976562 msec T T = 4 sec = 4 sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Simulink Simulink discrete discrete
pulse generators pulse generators
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
Temporal display scopes Temporal display scopes
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
f f
S S
= = 1024 Hz 1024 Hz
T T
simulation simulation
= 1/ = 1/f f
simulation simulation
= =
0.976562 msec 0.976562 msec
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
First Pulse First Pulse
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
Second Second
Pulse Pulse
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
f f
S S
= = 1024 Hz 1024 Hz
T T
simulation simulation
= 1/ = 1/f f
simulation simulation
= =
0.976562 msec 0.976562 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Period Period T T
o o
= = 4 sec 4 sec
Fundamental frequency Fundamental frequency
f f
o o
= 0.25 Hz = 0.25 Hz
Sample based simulation: Sample based simulation:
Period = 4096 samples Period = 4096 samples
must be 2 must be 2
N N
for FFT for FFT
Pulse width = 1024 Pulse width = 1024
samples samples
Sample time = 0.978562 Sample time = 0.978562
msec msec
4/4096 = 9.78562 x 10 4/4096 = 9.78562 x 10
- -4 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
The default display or The default display or autoscaling autoscaling for the temporal scope for the temporal scope
does not have a uniform amplitude. does not have a uniform amplitude.
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
5 5
1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Right Right- -Click Click on on
the vertical the vertical
axis and use axis and use
Axes properties Axes properties
to change the to change the
amplitude amplitude
scaling scaling
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified First periodic pulse Example 2.3 modified First periodic pulse
Second periodic pulse Second periodic pulse
T = 4 sec T = 4 sec
T = 1 sec T = 1 sec
T = 2 sec T = 2 sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Sum of periodic pulses Example 2.3 modified Sum of periodic pulses
T = 1 sec T = 1 sec
T = 2 sec T = 2 sec
T = 4 sec T = 4 sec
EX23.mdl EX23.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Spectral display Spectral display
of a complex pulse of a complex pulse
as the addition of as the addition of
two periodic pulses two periodic pulses
Spectral display scope Spectral display scope
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
f f
S S
= = 1024 Hz 1024 Hz
T T = 4 sec = 4096 = 4 sec = 4096
samples samples
f f
S S
= = f f
simulation simulation
for for
conveninence conveninence
Input signal is Input signal is
non non- -framed based framed based
so buffer input is so buffer input is
required required
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
f f
S S
= = 1024 Hz 1024 Hz
T T = 4 sec = 4096 = 4 sec = 4096
samples samples
Amplitude scaling Amplitude scaling
magnitude magnitude- -squared squared
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Scaled | FFT | Scaled | FFT |
2 2
using using Simulink Simulink Plot Tools. In Plot Tools. In Command Command
Window Window: :
>>plottools on >>plottools on Default spectral display Default spectral display
plottools
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Example 2.3 modified
Add data point markers (o) Add data point markers (o)
and change the frequency and change the frequency
axis to 5 Hz axis to 5 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
Power in the Frequency Domain Power in the Frequency Domain
Pages 38 Pages 38- -52 52
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Unscaled | FFT | Example 2.3 modified Unscaled | FFT |
2 2
Scaled | FFT | Scaled | FFT |
2 2
500 Hz 500 Hz
f f
s s
/ 2 / 2 = 512 Hz = 512 Hz
5 Hz 5 Hz
Spectral Resolution MS Eq 1.1 Spectral Resolution MS Eq 1.1
f f = = f f
s s
/ / N N = 1024/4096 = 0.25 Hz = 1024/4096 = 0.25 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT | Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT |
2 2
The Fourier series components are The Fourier series components are discrete. discrete. However, the However, the
Spectrum Scope does not read out the values. An Spectrum Scope does not read out the values. An
interactive cursor interactive cursor
is available in the is available in the
Figures Figures window window. .
Copy Copy and and Paste Paste
the Spectrum the Spectrum
Scope plot as Scope plot as
Figure 1 Figure 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT | Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT |
2 2
The interactive cursor can The interactive cursor can lock lock- -on on to the markers and read to the markers and read
out the data values sequentially. The interactive cursor is out the data values sequentially. The interactive cursor is
evoked from the toolbar for a Figure plot. evoked from the toolbar for a Figure plot.
x = 0 ( x = 0 (f = f = 0 Hz) 0 Hz)
y = 2362 = | y = 2362 = | FFT( FFT(f f = 0) | = 0) |
2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT | Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT |
2 2
The magnitude squared data values are divided by the The magnitude squared data values are divided by the
number of points in the FFT number of points in the FFT N N = 4096 to get the value. The = 4096 to get the value. The
magnitude of the DC (0 Hz) value is then: magnitude of the DC (0 Hz) value is then:
(2362/4096) (2362/4096)
0.5 0.5
= (0.56767) = (0.56767)
0.5 0.5
= 0.7594 = c = 0.7594 = c
0 0
= X = X
0 0
The DC value of the complex pulse is calculated as 0.75 The DC value of the complex pulse is calculated as 0.75
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT | Example 2.3 modified Scaled | FFT |
2 2
The first five spectral components can be read, computed The first five spectral components can be read, computed
and then compared to a direct calculation of and then compared to a direct calculation of c c
n n
. .
f f Hz Hz Data Data n n Component Component Spectral Resolution Spectral Resolution
0 2362 0 0.7594 MS Eq 1.1 0 2362 0 0.7594 MS Eq 1.1
0.25 1038 1 0.5034 0.25 1038 1 0.5034 f f = = f f
s s
/ / N N
0.5 103.8 2 0.1592 0.5 103.8 2 0.1592 f f = = 1024/4096 1024/4096
0.75 115.3 3 0.1678 0.75 115.3 3 0.1678 f f = = 0.25 Hz 0.25 Hz
1 0 4 0 1 0 4 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 Example 2.7
Rectangular pulse Rectangular pulse
train train
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 Example 2.7
Amplitude = 3 Amplitude = 3
Period Period T T
o o
= = 10 msec 10 msec
Fundamental frequency Fundamental frequency
f f
o o
= 100 Hz = 100 Hz
Pulse width = 2 msec Pulse width = 2 msec
Duty cycle = 2/10 = 0.2 Duty cycle = 2/10 = 0.2
Sample based simulation: Sample based simulation:
Period = 4096 samples Period = 4096 samples
Pulse width = 819 samples Pulse width = 819 samples
819/4096 819/4096 0.2 0.2
Sample time = 2.441 Sample time = 2.441 sec sec
10 10
- -2 2
/4096 = 2.441 x 10 /4096 = 2.441 x 10
- -6 6
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 Example 2.7
Period Period T T
o o
= = 10 msec 10 msec
Since the Spectrum Since the Spectrum
Scope requires 2 Scope requires 2
N N
= =
4096 samples, the 4096 samples, the
simulation time = simulation time =
10 msec divided by 10 msec divided by
the sample the sample time = time =
2.441 2.441 sec must be sec must be
4096 4096
10 10
- -2 2
/2.441 x 10 /2.441 x 10
- -6 6
= =
4096.68 4096.68
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 One cycle of periodic pulse Example 2.7 One cycle of periodic pulse
Magnitude squared of the Fast Fourier Transform | FFT | Magnitude squared of the Fast Fourier Transform | FFT |
2 2
T T
o o
= 10 msec = 10 msec
T T
pulse pulse
= 2 msec = 2 msec
DC value = 0.6 DC value = 0.6
3 3
| FFT (f = 0) | | FFT (f = 0) |
2 2
= 1447 = 1447
(1447/4096) (1447/4096)
0.5 0.5
= (0.353271) = (0.353271)
0.5 0.5
= 0.5944 = 0.5944
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 | FFT | Example 2.7 | FFT |
2 2
First First spectral null spectral null at 1/ at 1/T T
pulse pulse
= 1/2 msec = 500 Hz = 1/2 msec = 500 Hz
Successive Successive nulls nulls at at n/ n/T T
pulse pulse
= n x 500 Hz = n x 500 Hz
Hard to discern when the nulls are when plotted on a Hard to discern when the nulls are when plotted on a
linear scale linear scale
500 Hz 500 Hz
1 kHz 1 kHz
1.5 kHz 1.5 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 | FFT | Example 2.7 | FFT |
2 2
First First spectral null spectral null at 1/ at 1/T T
pulse pulse
= 1/2 msec = 500 Hz = 1/2 msec = 500 Hz
Successive Successive nulls nulls at at n/ n/T T
pulse pulse
= n x 500 Hz = n x 500 Hz
Easier to see when the nulls are plotted on a Easier to see when the nulls are plotted on a decibel decibel (dB) (dB)
scal scale where e where 40 dB 40 dB 0 0
500 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 1 kHz
1.5 kHz 1.5 kHz
-40 dB
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
de de ci ci bel bel ( (d d s s' ' - -b b l l, , - -b b l l') ')
n. n. ( (Abbr. Abbr. dB) dB)
A unit used to express relative difference in power or A unit used to express relative difference in power or
intensity, usually between two acoustic or electric signals, intensity, usually between two acoustic or electric signals,
equal to ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the equal to ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the
two levels. two levels.
The The bel bel (B) as a unit of measurement (B) as a unit of measurement
was originally proposed in 1929 by was originally proposed in 1929 by
W. H. Martin of Bell Labs. The bel W. H. Martin of Bell Labs. The bel
was too large for everyday use, so was too large for everyday use, so
the decibel (dB), equal to 0.1 B, the decibel (dB), equal to 0.1 B,
became more commonly used. became more commonly used.
Alexander Graham Bell
1847-1922
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 | FFT | Example 2.7 | FFT |
2 2
Spectrum Scope axis Spectrum Scope axis
properties properties
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.7 | FFT | Example 2.7 | FFT |
2 2
( (Data Data/4096) /4096)
0.5 0.5
f f Hz Hz Data Data Component n Calculated Component n Calculated c c
n n
0 1447 0.5944 0 0.6 0 1447 0.5944 0 0.6
100 1290 0.5612 1 0.561 100 1290 0.5612 1 0.561
200 844 0.4540 2 0.454 200 844 0.4540 2 0.454 cf cf S&M S&M
300 376 0.3030 3 0.303 pp 300 376 0.3030 3 0.303 pp 33 33- -35 35
400 81 0.1406 4 0.140 400 81 0.1406 4 0.140
500 500 0 0 5 0 0 0 5 0
2 2
0 0 n n n
n n n n
X =a X = a +b
| c | = X / 2 X = | 2 c |
c
n
X
o
= c
o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.8 Example 2.8
Rectangular pulse trains Rectangular pulse trains
with pulse period of 0.5 sec with pulse period of 0.5 sec
and pulse widths of and pulse widths of
0.0625 sec 0.0625 sec
0.125 sec 0.125 sec
0.250 sec 0.250 sec
Sample based simulation: Sample based simulation:
Period = 2 Period = 2
16 16
= 65536 = 65536
samples samples
Pulse widths = 8192, Pulse widths = 8192,
16384, 32768 16384, 32768
Sample time = 7.629 Sample time = 7.629 sec sec
0.5/65536 = 7.629 x 10 0.5/65536 = 7.629 x 10
- -6 6
EX28.mdl EX28.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.8 Example 2.8
Spectrum Scope has Spectrum Scope has
inherent amplitude and inherent amplitude and
frequency axes scaling frequency axes scaling
(but (but not not cursor readout) cursor readout)
EX28.mdl EX28.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
= 0.0625 sec = 0.0625 sec
= 0.250 sec = 0.250 sec
= 0.125 sec = 0.125 sec
S&M p. 36 S&M p. 36- -37 37
First null 4 Hz = 1/ First null 4 Hz = 1/
First null 8 Hz = 1/ First null 8 Hz = 1/
First null 16 Hz = 1/ First null 16 Hz = 1/
2 2
0 0 n n n
n n n n
X =a X = a +b
| c | = X / 2 X = | 2 c |
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2

+
= +

o
o
0 n o n
n=1
t +T
2
2 2
n
S 0
n=1
t
s(t) = X X cos(2 nf t + )
X 1
P s (t) dt = X
T 2
Average Normalized (R Average Normalized (R
L L
= 1 = 1 ) ) Power Power
Fourier series components Fourier series components
c c
n n
from simulation from simulation
Periodic signal as a Periodic signal as a
frequency domain frequency domain
representation representation
Average (R Average (R
L L
= 1 = 1 ) )
power in the signal P power in the signal P
S S
as as
a time domain or a time domain or
frequency domain frequency domain
representation representation
Parseval Parseval s s Theorem Theorem
X
o
= c
o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2

+

= +

o
o
0 n o n
n=1
t +T
2
2 2
n
S 0
n=1
L L
t
s(t) = X X cos(2 nf t + )
X 1 1
P s (t) dt = X
T R R 2
Average (R Average (R
L L
1 1 ) ) Power Power
The average The average non non- -normalized normalized (R (R
L L
1 1 ) ) power in the power in the
signal P signal P
S S
as a time domain or frequency domain as a time domain or frequency domain
representation representation
Parseval Parseval s s Theorem Theorem
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2

= +

o
o
t +T
2
2 2
n
S 0
n=1
t
X 1
P s (t) dt = X
T 2
Parseval Parseval s s Theorem Theorem
Marc Marc- -Antoine Antoine Parseval Parseval des des Chnes Chnes was was
a French mathematician, most famous a French mathematician, most famous
for what is now known as for what is now known as Parseval Parseval s s
Theorem, which presaged the Theorem, which presaged the
equivalence of the Fourier Transform. equivalence of the Fourier Transform.
A monarchist opposed to the French A monarchist opposed to the French
Revolution, Revolution, Parseval Parseval fled the country fled the country 1755 1755- -1836 1836
after being imprisoned in 1792 by Napoleon for after being imprisoned in 1792 by Napoleon for
publishing tracts critical of the government. publishing tracts critical of the government.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Examples 2.9 and 2.10 Examples 2.9 and 2.10
Normalized power Normalized power
spectrum of a spectrum of a
rectangular pulse rectangular pulse
and a Butterworth and a Butterworth
low pass filtered low pass filtered
(LPF) rectangular (LPF) rectangular
pulse pulse
EX29.mdl EX29.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Examples 2.9 and 2.10 Examples 2.9 and 2.10
Amplitude = 3 Amplitude = 3
Period Period T T
o o
= 10 msec = 10 msec
Fundamental frequency Fundamental frequency
f f
o o
= 100 Hz = 100 Hz
Pulse width = 2 msec Pulse width = 2 msec
Duty cycle = 2/10 = 0.2 Duty cycle = 2/10 = 0.2
Sample based simulation: Sample based simulation:
Period = 4096 samples Period = 4096 samples
Pulse width = 819 samples Pulse width = 819 samples
819/4096 819/4096 0.2 0.2
Sample time = 10 Sample time = 10
- -2 2
/4096 = 2.441 x 10 /4096 = 2.441 x 10
- -6 6
= 2.441 = 2.441 sec sec
Sampling rate = 1/ 2.441 x 10 Sampling rate = 1/ 2.441 x 10
- -6 6
409.6 kHz 409.6 kHz
EX29.mdl EX29.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Examples 2.9 and 2.10 Examples 2.9 and 2.10
Since this is a Since this is a MATLAB MATLAB and and Simulink Simulink sample based sample based
simulation simulation (period = 4096 samples, pulse width = 819 (period = 4096 samples, pulse width = 819
samples) a samples) a digital low pass filter digital low pass filter design is used here (a design is used here (a
time time- -based simulation based simulation requires an requires an analog filter analog filter design) design)
EX29.mdl EX29.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.9 and 2.10 Digital Low Pass Filter Design Example 2.9 and 2.10 Digital Low Pass Filter Design
f f
cuttoff cuttoff
= 300 Hz = 300 Hz
f f
s s
= 409600 = 409600
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Power Spectral Density Power Spectral Density
The normalized (R The normalized (R
L L
= 1 = 1 ) ) power spectral density power spectral density
(PSD) for periodic signals is (PSD) for periodic signals is discrete discrete because of the because of the
fundamental frequency f fundamental frequency f
o o
= 1/T = 1/T
o o
= 100 Hz here. = 100 Hz here.
However, for However, for aperiodic aperiodic signals the PSD is conceptually signals the PSD is conceptually
continuous continuous. Periodic signals contain . Periodic signals contain no information no information
and only aperiodic signals are, in fact, communicated. and only aperiodic signals are, in fact, communicated.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Power Spectral Density Power Spectral Density
Simulated by | FFT | Simulated by | FFT |
2 2
in in
MATLAB MATLAB and and Simulink Simulink to to
obtain c obtain c
n n
from fromwhich we which we
can derive can derive X X
n n
| FFT | | FFT |
2 2
PSD PSD
2 2
0 0 n n n
n n n n
X =a X = a +b
| c | = X / 2 X = | 2 c | X
o
= c
o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Power Spectral Density Simulated by | FFT | Power Spectral Density Simulated by | FFT |
2 2
The dB scale for PSD is more prevalent for analysis The dB scale for PSD is more prevalent for analysis
Spectral nulls
dB dB
Linear Linear
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Power Spectral Density Low Pass Filtered Power Spectral Density Low Pass Filtered
dB dB
dB dB
f f
cutoff cutoff
= 300 Hz = 300 Hz
LPF LPF
Unfiltered Unfiltered
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Bandwidth Bandwidth
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a signal is the width of the frequency of a signal is the width of the frequency
band in Hertz that contains a sufficient number of the band in Hertz that contains a sufficient number of the
signal signal s frequency components to reproduce the signal s frequency components to reproduce the signal
with an acceptable amount of distortion. with an acceptable amount of distortion.
Bandwidth is a nebulous term and Bandwidth is a nebulous term and
communication engineers must communication engineers must
always define what if meant by always define what if meant by
bandwidth bandwidth in the context of use. in the context of use.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Total Power in the Signal Total Power in the Signal
Parseval Parseval s s Theorem allows us to determine the Theorem allows us to determine the total total
normalized power normalized power in the signal without the infinite sum of in the signal without the infinite sum of
Fourier series components by integrating in the temporal Fourier series components by integrating in the temporal
domain: domain:
From Example 2.10 the total From Example 2.10 the total
normalized (R normalized (R
L L
= 1 = 1 ) ) power in the power in the
signal is 1.8 V signal is 1.8 V
2 2
( (not not W) and the percentage of the total W) and the percentage of the total
power in the signal in a power in the signal in a bandwidth bandwidth of 300 Hz is of 300 Hz is
approximately 88% (S&M p. 45). approximately 88% (S&M p. 45).

= +

o
o
t +T
2
2 2
n
S 0
n=1
t
X 1
P s (t) dt = X
T 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
The Fourier Transform The Fourier Transform
Pages 52 Pages 52- -69 69
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Example 2.12
Spectrum of a Spectrum of a
simulated single simulated single
pulse from a very pulse from a very
low duty cycle low duty cycle
rectangular pulse rectangular pulse
train train
EX212.mdl EX212.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse
| FFT | | FFT |
2 2
pulse width = 1 msec pulse width = 1 msec
pulse period = 1 sec pulse period = 1 sec
duty cycle = 10 duty cycle = 10
- -3 3
/1 = 0.001 = 0.1% /1 = 0.001 = 0.1%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse
The The magnitude of the Fourier Transform of a single pulse magnitude of the Fourier Transform of a single pulse
is is continuous continuous and and not discrete not discrete since there is no Fourier since there is no Fourier
series representation. In the series representation. In the MATLAB MATLAB and and Simulink Simulink
simulation here the data points are very dense and simulation here the data points are very dense and
virtually display a continuous plot. virtually display a continuous plot.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT | Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT |
2 2
S&M p. 56 S&M p. 56- -60 60
S(f S(f) = A ) = A sinc( sinc( f f ) )
A A = 1(10 = 1(10
- -3 3
) = 10 ) = 10
- -3 3
(c (c
o o
/65536) /65536)
0.5 0.5
= 10 = 10
- -3 3
c c
o o
= 0.065536 = 0.065536
c c
o o
= 0.065536 = 0.065536
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT | Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT |
2 2
S&M p. 56 S&M p. 56- -60 60
S(f S(f) = A ) = A sinc( sinc( f f ) )
Zero Zero- -crossing at integral multiples of 1/ crossing at integral multiples of 1/ = 1/10 = 1/10
- -3 3
= 1000 Hz = 1000 Hz
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
Hz Hz
0.005
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse
| FFT | | FFT |
2 2
pulse width = 10 msec pulse width = 10 msec
pulse period = 1 sec pulse period = 1 sec
duty cycle = 10 duty cycle = 10
- -2 2
/1 = 0.01 = 1% /1 = 0.01 = 1%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT | Example 2.12 Simulated single pulse | FFT |
2 2
S&M p. 56 S&M p. 56- -60 60
S(f S(f) = A ) = A sinc( sinc( f f ) )
Zero Zero- -crossing at integral multiples of 1/ crossing at integral multiples of 1/ = 1/10 = 1/10
- -2 2
= 100 Hz = 100 Hz
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Hz Hz
0.05
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Properties Properties
of the of the
Fourier Fourier
Transform Transform
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Properties Properties
of the of the
Fourier Fourier
Transform Transform
Modulation Modulation
principle principle
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
Normalized Energy Spectral Density Normalized Energy Spectral Density
Pages 60 Pages 60- -65 65
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Normalized Energy Normalized Energy
If If s(t s(t) is a ) is a non non- -periodic, finite energy signal periodic, finite energy signal (a single (a single
pulse) then the average normalized power P pulse) then the average normalized power P
S S
is 0: is 0:
However, the normalized energy E However, the normalized energy E
S S
for the same for the same s(t s(t) is ) is
non non- -zero by definition zero by definition (S&M p. 60 (S&M p. 60- -61). 61).

=
=

o
o
t +T
2 2
S
T T
t
2 2
S
1 finite value
P lim s (t) dt = lim =0 V
T T
E s (t) dt V - sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Parseval Parseval s s Energy Theorem Energy Theorem
Parseval Parseval s s energy theorem follows directly then from the energy theorem follows directly then from the
discussion of power in a periodic signal: discussion of power in a periodic signal:
Energy Spectral Density Energy Spectral Density
Analogous to the power spectral density is the energy Analogous to the power spectral density is the energy
spectral density (ESD) spectral density (ESD) (f). For a linear, time (f). For a linear, time- -invariant (LTI) invariant (LTI)
system with a transfer function system with a transfer function H(f H(f), the output ESD which is ), the output ESD which is
the energy flow through the system is: the energy flow through the system is:

OUT OUT
(f (f) ) = =
IN IN
(f (f) | ) | H(f H(f) | ) |
2 2


=

2 2 2
S
E s (t) dt = | S (f) | df V - sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
Energy Spectral Density Energy Spectral Density
The energy spectral density (ESD) The energy spectral density (ESD) (f) is the magnitude (f) is the magnitude
squared of the Fourier transform squared of the Fourier transform S(f S(f) of a pulse signal ) of a pulse signal s(t s(t): ):
(f) (f) = | = | S(f S(f) | ) |
2 2
The ESD can be The ESD can be approximated approximated by the magnitude squared by the magnitude squared
of the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) in a of the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) in a MATLAB MATLAB and and
Simulink Simulink simulation as described in Chapter 3. simulation as described in Chapter 3.
(f) (f) | FFT | | FFT |
2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 2
End of Chapter 2
End of Chapter 2
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency Domain Analysis
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
Goals in Communication System Goals in Communication System
Design Design
Pages 75 Pages 75- -76 76
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Communication System Design Communication System Design
Source Transmitter Source Transmitter
Channel Channel
Noise Noise
Receiver Receiver
An information An information source source (voice, music, video, text, signals (voice, music, video, text, signals
or images) is or images) is modulated modulated in the in the transmitter transmitter . .
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Communication System Design Communication System Design
Source Transmitter Source Transmitter
Channel Channel
Noise Noise
Receiver Receiver
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
The output of the transmitter is inputted to the physical The output of the transmitter is inputted to the physical
transmission medium transmission medium (wires, fiber optics, wireless or (wires, fiber optics, wireless or
acoustic) as a acoustic) as a channel channel with additive with additive noise noise. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Communication System Design Communication System Design
Source Transmitter Source Transmitter
Channel Channel
Noise Noise
Receiver Receiver
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
The output of the channel is inputted to the The output of the channel is inputted to the receiver receiver
which attempts to which attempts to demodulate demodulate the signal and the signal and recover recover the the
data. data.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Rectangular Pulse Amplitude
Modulation (PAM) Modulation (PAM)
Pages 18 Pages 18- -20 20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Random Integer Generator simulates a binary information Random Integer Generator simulates a binary information
source, bit rate source, bit rate r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Random Integer Random Integer
Generator from Generator from
the the Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset, , Comm Comm
Sources Sources
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Random Integer Random Integer
Generator block from Generator block from
the the Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset, , Comm Comm
Sources Sources
binary binary
random seed random seed
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Binary data [0,1] Binary Polar PAM transmitter Binary data [0,1] Binary Polar PAM transmitter 5 V 5 V
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
Transmit data = ([0,1] Transmit data = ([0,1] 0.5 0.5)10 V = )10 V = 5 V 5 V
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) Channel Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) Channel
provides a random noise source, mean = 0 V, variance provides a random noise source, mean = 0 V, variance

2 2
= 0.5 V = 0.5 V
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
AWGN Channel AWGN Channel
block from the block from the
Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset, Channels , Channels
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
AWGN Channel AWGN Channel
block from the block from the
Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset, ,
Channels Channels
random seed random seed
variance variance
2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
Scope displays Transmit and Receive temporal data Scope displays Transmit and Receive temporal data
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Output of Binary Polar PAM Transmitter Output of Binary Polar PAM Transmitter
Input of Binary PAM Receiver with AWGN Input of Binary PAM Receiver with AWGN
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
Simple PAM receiver consists of a Sample and Hold Simple PAM receiver consists of a Sample and Hold
block with synchronous timing at block with synchronous timing at T T
b b
/2 /2 provided by a provided by a
pulse generator. This induces a delay of pulse generator. This induces a delay of T T
b b
/2 /2.
The Sign and Lookup Table blocks convert the The Sign and Lookup Table blocks convert the
received data to the correct format (see MS p. 19). received data to the correct format (see MS p. 19).
MS Figure 2.1 MS Figure 2.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
The Sign block The Sign block
converts the converts the
variable amplitude variable amplitude
bipolar received bipolar received
data from the data from the
Sample Sample- -and and- -
Hold block to Hold block to
trinary trinary data data
[ [ 1, 0, 1] 1, 0, 1]
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) Rectangular Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
The Lookup Table The Lookup Table
block converts the block converts the
trinary trinary data [ data [ 1, 0, 1] 1, 0, 1]
to a replica of the to a replica of the
bipolar transmitted bipolar transmitted
signal [ signal [ 5] for 5] for
comparison by comparison by
mapping 0 to +5 mapping 0 to +5
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Input of Binary PAM Receiver with AWGN Input of Binary PAM Receiver with AWGN
Output of Sample and Hold block Output of Sample and Hold block
T T
b b
/ 2 delay / 2 delay
T
b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Output of Sample and Hold block Output of Sample and Hold block
Output of Sign and Lookup Table blocks Output of Sign and Lookup Table blocks
T T
b b
/ 2 delay / 2 delay
T T
b b
/ 2 delay / 2 delay
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Transmitted PAM signal Transmitted PAM signal
Received PAM signal with no errors Received PAM signal with no errors
T T
b b
/ 2 delay / 2 delay
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
Baseband Modulation Using Baseband Modulation Using
Rectangular Pulses and Binary Rectangular Pulses and Binary
Pulse Amplitude Modulation Pulse Amplitude Modulation
Pages Pages 76 76- -88 88
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
00 00
01 01
10 10
11 11
MS for S&M Figure 3 MS for S&M Figure 3- -5 5
Fig35.mdl Fig35.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Pulse Generator block Pulse Generator block
outputs a outputs a 1 V pulse 1 V pulse
with a width of 20 msec with a width of 20 msec
and a nominal pulse and a nominal pulse
period of 200 msec period of 200 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Transport Delay block Transport Delay block
delays the input by delays the input by
20 msec using a sample 20 msec using a sample
data buffer automatically data buffer automatically
set set
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 PAM generation of data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
00 00
01 01
10 10
11 11
MS for S&M Figure 3 MS for S&M Figure 3- -5 5
Fig35.mdl Fig35.mdl
Time Time- -based based
sampling, sampling,
sampling rate sampling rate
f f
S S
= 50 kHz, = 50 kHz,
sampling period sampling period
T T
S S
= 1/ = 1/ f f
S S
= 20 = 20 sec sec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 00 PAM Output Data 00 PAM Output
Data 01 PAM Output Data 01 PAM Output
2 2 = 20 msec = 20 msec
2 2 = 20 msec = 20 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 10 PAM Output Data 10 PAM Output
Data 11 PAM Output Data 11 PAM Output
2 2 = 20 msec = 20 msec
2 2 = 20 msec = 20 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
00 00
01 01
10 10
11 11
MS for S&M Figure 3 MS for S&M Figure 3- -5 5
ESD ESD | FFT | | FFT |
2 2
Fig35spectrum.mdl Fig35spectrum.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Spectrum Scope requires a discrete or sampled signal Spectrum Scope requires a discrete or sampled signal
input. Pulse Generator block changed to sampled input. Pulse Generator block changed to sampled- -based based
signal. Integer Delay block used to delay the pulse. signal. Integer Delay block used to delay the pulse.
MS for S&M Figure 3 MS for S&M Figure 3- -5 5
Fig35spectrum.mdl Fig35spectrum.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Pulse Generator block Pulse Generator block
changed to changed to sampled sampled- -based based
signal. signal.
Sample time Sample time T T
S S
= 20 = 20 sec sec
Pulse period = 500 000 Pulse period = 500 000
samples (10 sec) samples (10 sec)
Pulse width = 1000 Pulse width = 1000
samples (20 msec) samples (20 msec)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Integer Delay block for Integer Delay block for
sampled sampled- -based signal. based signal.
Sample time Sample time T T
S S
= 20 = 20 sec sec
Delay = 1000 Delay = 1000
samples (0.2 sec) samples (0.2 sec)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11 Spectrum of PAM data sequence 00, 01, 10 and 11
Spectrum Scope simulation for N = 2 Spectrum Scope simulation for N = 2
18 18
= 262 144 = 262 144
samples samples.
Simulation time Simulation time T = N / T = N / f f
S S
= 262 144 / 50 000 = 5.24288 = 262 144 / 50 000 = 5.24288
sec sec
Frequency resolution Frequency resolution f f = = f f
S S
/ N / N = 50 000/262 144 = = 50 000/262 144 =
0.1907 Hz 0.1907 Hz
MS for S&M Figure 3 MS for S&M Figure 3- -5 5
Fig35spectrum.mdl Fig35spectrum.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 00 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 00 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
Data 00 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 00 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
dB dB
1/2 1/2 1/ 1/
50 Hz 50 Hz
25 Hz 25 Hz
= 20 msec = 20 msec
S&M Figure 3 S&M Figure 3- -6a 6a
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 01 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 01 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
Data 01 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 01 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
dB dB
1/ 1/
50 Hz 50 Hz
= 20 msec = 20 msec
S&M Figure 3 S&M Figure 3- -6b 6b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 10 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 10 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
Data 10 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 10 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
dB dB
1/ 1/
50 Hz 50 Hz
= 20 msec = 20 msec
S&M Figure 3 S&M Figure 3- -6c 6c
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Data 11 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 11 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
Data 11 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT | Data 11 PAM simulated ESD Output | FFT |
2 2
dB dB
1/2 1/2 1/ 1/
50 Hz 50 Hz
25 Hz 25 Hz
= 20 msec = 20 msec
S&M Figure 3 S&M Figure 3- -6d 6d
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Sum of the Sum of the equally likely equally likely simulated ESD simulated ESD | FFT | | FFT |
2 2
for data for data
00, 01, 10 and 11 00, 01, 10 and 11 unscaled unscaled by probability p = 0.25 by probability p = 0.25
1/ 1/
50 Hz 50 Hz
S&M Figure 3.7 S&M Figure 3.7
2/ 2/
100 Hz 100 Hz
150 Hz 150 Hz
3/ 3/
(f) = 2A (f) = 2A
2 2

2 2
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f f ) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Power of a Series of Pulses Power of a Series of Pulses
The The power power of a series of pulses is the of a series of pulses is the energy energy in a series in a series
of pulses divided by the of pulses divided by the time time to transmit the series of to transmit the series of
pulses (S&M p. 83). pulses (S&M p. 83).
Power = Energy / Transmit Time Power = Energy / Transmit Time
This concept can be extended to find the average This concept can be extended to find the average
normalized power spectral density normalized power spectral density (PSD) (PSD) G(f G(f) of a series ) of a series
of rectangular pulses: of rectangular pulses:
G(f G(f) = n A ) = n A
2 2

2 2
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f f ) / n ) / n = A = A
2 2
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f f ) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The total power in a series of rectangular pulses is a The total power in a series of rectangular pulses is a
function of the function of the bandwidth bandwidth of the data transmission. of the data transmission.
1/ 1/
90% 90%
S&M Figure 3 S&M Figure 3- -10 10
2/ 2/
95% 95%
96.5% 96.5%
3/ 3/
(f) = 2A (f) = 2A
2 2

2 2
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f f ) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The rectangular pulse width The rectangular pulse width is the entire bit time is the entire bit time T T
b b
here and is here and is optimum optimum in the bandwidth sense. in the bandwidth sense.
Table 3 Table 3- -1 Bandwidth of a Binary Rectangular PAM 1 Bandwidth of a Binary Rectangular PAM
Signal as a Percentage of the Total Power (S&M p. 86, Signal as a Percentage of the Total Power (S&M p. 86,
MS p. 22) with MS p. 22) with = = T T
b b
= 1 / = 1 / r r
b b
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
1/ 1/T T
b b
90% 90%
1.5/ 1.5/T T
b b
93% 93%
2/ 2/T T
b b
95% 95%
3/ 3/T T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
4/ 4/T T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
5/ 5/T T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Rectangular PAM Rectangular PAM
Power Spectral Density Power Spectral Density
Pages 20 Pages 20- -22 22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
For an For an ensemble ensemble (collection) of pseudo (collection) of pseudo- -random random
rectangular PAM data signals, the power spectral rectangular PAM data signals, the power spectral
density (PSD) is used since the bit period density (PSD) is used since the bit period T T
b b
is finite is finite
and not infinite as for a single pulse with its ESD. and not infinite as for a single pulse with its ESD.
The pulse width The pulse width can be less than the bit period can be less than the bit period T T
b b
but but
this is not bandwidth efficient. this is not bandwidth efficient.
The The M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink
simulation of a binary simulation of a binary
rectangular PAM transmitter rectangular PAM transmitter
(MS Figure 2.1) is modified (MS Figure 2.1) is modified
for a variable pulse width for a variable pulse width
T T
b b
to verify these to verify these
concepts. concepts.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM with variable pulse width Rectangular PAM with variable pulse width T T
b b
= 1 = 1
msec msec
Pulse train, 0 to 1 V, pulse period 1 msec, pulse width Pulse train, 0 to 1 V, pulse period 1 msec, pulse width
0.5 msec (50% duty cycle) 0.5 msec (50% duty cycle)
Transmitter of MS Figure 2.1 modified Transmitter of MS Figure 2.1 modified
MSFig21mod.mdl MSFig21mod.mdl
Multiplier Multiplier
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM with Rectangular PAM with
variable pulse width variable pulse width
T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Pulse train = 0 to 1 V Pulse train = 0 to 1 V
Pulse period = 1 msec Pulse period = 1 msec
MSFig21mod.mdl MSFig21mod.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM with Rectangular PAM with
variable pulse width variable pulse width
T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Pulse width = 50% Pulse width = 50%
(0.5 msec) (0.5 msec)
Phase delay = 0.5 msec Phase delay = 0.5 msec
MSFig21mod.mdl MSFig21mod.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Top: Top: Binary data source Binary data source. . Middle: Middle: pulse train. pulse train. Bottom: Bottom:
rectangular PAM transmit data output with 50% duty cycle. rectangular PAM transmit data output with 50% duty cycle.
T T
b b
T T
b b
/2 /2
Product Product
with Gain with Gain
Data Data
Duty Cycle Duty Cycle
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PSD of rectangular PAM PSD of rectangular PAM
Spectrum scope block calculates the PSD of the output of Spectrum scope block calculates the PSD of the output of
the rectangular PAM transmitter with variable duty cycle the rectangular PAM transmitter with variable duty cycle
/ / T T
b b
Fig21modspec.mdl Fig21modspec.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Scaled PSD of rectangular PAM Scaled PSD of rectangular PAM / / T T
b b
= 0.5, = 0.5, T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
The impulse spectral terms The impulse spectral terms
[(2n [(2n 1) f 1) f
o o
] where f ] where f
o o
= 1 / = 1 / T T
b b
= =
1 kHz are due to the 1 kHz are due to the periodic periodic
signal imposed by the product signal imposed by the product
modulator with 50% duty cycle modulator with 50% duty cycle
first first- -null bandwidth = 2 kHz = null bandwidth = 2 kHz = 1/ 1/ = 2/T = 2/T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Scaled PSD of rectangular PAM Scaled PSD of rectangular PAM / / T T
b b
= 1, = 1, T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
No impulse spectral terms in No impulse spectral terms in
the PSD for the rectangular the PSD for the rectangular
PAM signal because the PAM signal because the
signal is only signal is only random random with with
100% duty cycle ( 100% duty cycle ( = = T T
b b
)
first first- -null bandwidth = 1 kHz = 1/ null bandwidth = 1 kHz = 1/ = 1/ = 1/T T
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Performance of Performance of Rectangular Rectangular
PAM in a Simple Receiver in PAM in a Simple Receiver in
AWGN AWGN
Pages 66 Pages 66- -69 69
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The performance of rectangular PAM ( The performance of rectangular PAM ( = = T T
b b
, , 100% 100%
duty cycle) in a simple receiver (single point sampling at duty cycle) in a simple receiver (single point sampling at
T T
b b
/ 2) in AWGN is assessed by the / 2) in AWGN is assessed by the bit error rate bit error rate (BER) (BER)
The received binary data is compared The received binary data is compared bit bit- -by by- -bit bit to the to the
transmitted binary data by the Error Rate Calculation transmitted binary data by the Error Rate Calculation
block block
MS Figure 2.7 MS Figure 2.7
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM with AWGN and BER analysis Rectangular PAM with AWGN and BER analysis
The Error Rate The Error Rate
Calculation block delays Calculation block delays
the transmitted binary the transmitted binary
data to correlate it with data to correlate it with
the received binary data the received binary data
The BER output is The BER output is
displayed numerically displayed numerically
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM with AWGN and BER analysis Rectangular PAM with AWGN and BER analysis
The computation delay The computation delay
allows the BER analysis allows the BER analysis
to be to be delayed delayed before before
starting if warranted (no starting if warranted (no
delay is used here) delay is used here)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Spectrally white Gaussian noise is added in the channel Spectrally white Gaussian noise is added in the channel
with variance with variance
2 2
in volts by the AWGN Channel block in volts by the AWGN Channel block
The The initial seed initial seed is is
the MATLAB the MATLAB
variable variable randseed randseed
so that each so that each
simulation is simulation is
unique unique
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The signal The signal- -to to- -noise ratio (SNR) is the noise ratio (SNR) is the metric metric for the BER for the BER
analysis. The signal power in the rectangular PAM signal analysis. The signal power in the rectangular PAM signal
is A is A
2 2
/ R / R
L L
and the noise power is and the noise power is
2 2
/ R / R
L L
. The SNR then . The SNR then
is: is:
SNR = (A SNR = (A
2 2
/ R / R
L L
)/(
2 2
/ R / R
L L
) = A ) = A
2 2
/ /
2 2
SNR = 10 log SNR = 10 log
10 10
[A [A
2 2
/ /
2 2
] dB ] dB
MS Figure 2.7 MS Figure 2.7
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The signal power in the rectangular PAM signal is A The signal power in the rectangular PAM signal is A
2 2
/ R / R
L L
W (watts) and the normalized power (R W (watts) and the normalized power (R
L L
= 1 = 1 ) is ) is
A A
2 2
V V
2 2
(volts squared). (volts squared).
Although it is correct to use the units V Although it is correct to use the units V
2 2
for normalized for normalized
power and then power and then divide divide by R by R
L L
to convert to W, the to convert to W, the
convention is to use the term convention is to use the term normalized power W normalized power W even even
though the units are V though the units are V
2 2
. Here A = . Here A = 5 V and the 5 V and the
normalized power = 25 W. normalized power = 25 W.
MS Figure 2.7 MS Figure 2.7
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM performance in a simple receiver with Rectangular PAM performance in a simple receiver with
AWGN (MS p. 24) AWGN (MS p. 24)
Table 2.2 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an Table 2.2 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an
Unfiltered Rectangular PAM Digital Communication Unfiltered Rectangular PAM Digital Communication
System, Normalized Signal Power = 25 W. System, Normalized Signal Power = 25 W.
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
0 0 0 0
13.98 13.98 1 1 0 0
12.21 12.21 1.5 1.5 0 0
10.97 10.97 2 2 2 2 10 10
- -4 4
6.98 6.98 5 5 1.24 1.24 10 10
- -2 2
3.98 3.98 10 10 5.64 5.64 10 10
- -2 2
3.19 3.19 12 12 7.43 7.43 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The BER performance of a rectangular PAM with AWGN The BER performance of a rectangular PAM with AWGN
can be improved with the addition of a low can be improved with the addition of a low- -pass filter pass filter
(LPF) in the receiver. The LPF passes only the bandwidth (LPF) in the receiver. The LPF passes only the bandwidth
required for the modulated signal. required for the modulated signal.
MS Figure 2.9 MS Figure 2.9
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The low The low- -pass filter in the rectangular PAM receiver is pass filter in the rectangular PAM receiver is
an Analog Filter Design block an Analog Filter Design block
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The available simulated analog low The available simulated analog low- -pass filter types are pass filter types are
Bessel, Butterworth, Chebyshev types I and II, and Bessel, Butterworth, Chebyshev types I and II, and
Elliptic. The Chebyshev LPF with Elliptic. The Chebyshev LPF with f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1200 Hz, in = 1200 Hz, in- -band band
ripple = 0.1 dB ripple = 0.1 dB displays the maximum displays the maximum roll roll- -off off attenuation attenuation
with a with a trade trade- -off off of the in of the in- -band ripple. band ripple.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM performance in a LPF receiver with Rectangular PAM performance in a LPF receiver with
AWGN (SVU p. 73) AWGN (SVU p. 73)
Table 2.3 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an Table 2.3 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an
LPF (9 LPF (9- -pole Chebyshev, 0.1 dB ripple, pole Chebyshev, 0.1 dB ripple, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1.2 kHz) = 1.2 kHz)
Binary Rectangular PAM Digital Communication Binary Rectangular PAM Digital Communication
System, Normalized Signal Power = 25 W. System, Normalized Signal Power = 25 W.
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
0 0 0 0
10.00 10.00 2.5 2.5 0 0
0.96 0.96 20 20 0 0
3.01 3.01 50 50 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
6.02 6.02 100 100 6.3 6.3 10 10
- -3 3
9.03 9.03 200 200 3.63 3.63 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Comparison of BER performance in binary rectangular Comparison of BER performance in binary rectangular
PAM in an unfiltered and LPF receiver: PAM in an unfiltered and LPF receiver:
Unfiltered Receiver Unfiltered Receiver
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
6.98 6.98 5 5 1.24 1.24 10 10
- -2 2
3.98 3.98 10 10 5.64 5.64 10 10
- -2 2
LPF Receiver LPF Receiver
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
6.02 6.02 100 100 6.3 6.3 10 10
- -3 3
9.03 9.03 200 200 3.63 3.63 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Rectangular PAM Rectangular PAM 5 V, 5 V, 1 kb/sec with AWGN, 1 kb/sec with AWGN,
2 2
= 10 V = 10 V
2 2
Simple receive data sampling occurs at the mid Simple receive data sampling occurs at the mid- -point point T T
b b
/2 /2
+ 5V + 5V
- -5 V 5 V
T T
b b
sampling points at (2n+1) sampling points at (2n+1)T T
b b
/2 /2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
Pulse Shaping to Improve Pulse Shaping to Improve
Spectral Efficiency: Sinc Pulses Spectral Efficiency: Sinc Pulses
Pages Pages 89 89- -101 101
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
A A practical practical sinc sinc- -shaped pulse has a finite duration T = shaped pulse has a finite duration T =
4 4 T T
b b
. . Zero Zero- -crossings occur at crossings occur at n / n / r r
b b
= = n n T T
b b
binary 0 binary 0
binary 1 binary 1 r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
1/ 1/r r
b b
MS Figures 2.15 and 2.16 MS Figures 2.15 and 2.16
2/ 2/r r
b b
3/ 3/r r
b b
4/r
b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Bandwidth of a sinc Bandwidth of a sinc- -shaped PAM pulse is shaped PAM pulse is r r
b b
/ 2 Hz which / 2 Hz which
is 50% of the first is 50% of the first- -null bandwidth of a rectangular PAM null bandwidth of a rectangular PAM
pulse ( pulse (r r
b b
Hz). Hz).
binary 0
binary 1 binary 1
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
1/ 1/r r
b b
8 8/ /r r
b b
3/ 3/r r
b b
+5 V +5 V
5 V 5 V
0 0
4/ 4/r r
b b
2/ 2/r r
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Since the practical sinc Since the practical sinc- -shaped pulses have shaped pulses have zero zero- -
crossings crossings at multiples of 1 / at multiples of 1 / r r
b b
= = T T
b b
there is there is no interference no interference
between adjacent pulses if sampled at between adjacent pulses if sampled at T T
b b
. .
startup startup
binary 1 binary 1
binary 0 binary 0
1/ 1/r r
b b
sampling points at n sampling points at nT T
b b
MS Figures 2.17 and 2.18 MS Figures 2.17 and 2.18
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Sinc PAM Power Spectral Density (S&M p. 90, Sinc PAM Power Spectral Density (S&M p. 90,
MS p. 29 MS p. 29- -30) 30)
The power spectral density (PSD) for a sinc PAM signal is The power spectral density (PSD) for a sinc PAM signal is
derived from the energy spectral density (ESD) for a derived from the energy spectral density (ESD) for a
single sinc pulse. The ESD single sinc pulse. The ESD (f) (f) for a sinc pulse with a for a sinc pulse with a
peak amplitude A and data rate peak amplitude A and data rate r r
b b
is: is:
(f) = (A / (f) = (A / r r
b b
) )
2 2
= A = A
2 2
T T
b b
2 2
r r
b b
/2 /2 f f r r
b b
/2 /2
As for rectangular pulses earlier, As for rectangular pulses earlier, the the normalized normalized PSD PSD G(f G(f) )
of a series of sinc pulses is: of a series of sinc pulses is:
G(f G(f) = n A ) = n A
2 2
T T
b b
2 2
/ n / n T T
b b
= A = A
2 2
T T
b b
r r
b b
/2 /2 f f r r
b b
/2 /2
where 1 / where 1 / r r
b b
= = T T
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Sinc Pulse Amplitude Sinc Pulse Amplitude
Modulation Modulation
Pages 27 Pages 27- -33 33
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink generation of a generation of a practical practical (finite (finite
duration) sinc PAM signal uses the duration) sinc PAM signal uses the impulse response impulse response of of
a a filter filter (MS p. 27 (MS p. 27- -29). 29).
impulse train impulse train
data source data source
sinc impulse filter sinc impulse filter
MS Figure 2.14 MS Figure 2.14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The Random Integer Generator block data has an The Random Integer Generator block data has an
amplitude of amplitude of 0, 1 0, 1 V and a period of 1 msec (1/ V and a period of 1 msec (1/r r
b b
). The ). The
output is offset and scaled to provide a output is offset and scaled to provide a 1 V data 1 V data
source. source.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The Pulse Generator The Pulse Generator
block has an amplitude of block has an amplitude of
1 V, a period of 1 msec or 1 V, a period of 1 msec or
a frequency of 1 kHz a frequency of 1 kHz
( (r r
b b
) and a pulse width of 2% ) and a pulse width of 2%
of the period (20 of the period (20 sec) sec)
which is the which is the Simulink Simulink
simulation time simulation time. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Simulink Simulink Comm Comm Filters Filters in the in the Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset provides the Raised Cosine Transmit Filter provides the Raised Cosine Transmit Filter
which c which can generate an generate
a sinc a sinc when the when the
rolloff factor rolloff factor = 0 = 0. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Raised Cosine Transmit Raised Cosine Transmit
Filter block generates a Filter block generates a
sinc with a sinc with a rolloff factor rolloff factor
= 0. The = 0. The group delay group delay
of 4 symbols specifies of 4 symbols specifies
the the 4 4T T
b b
duration. duration.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Raised Cosine Transmit Raised Cosine Transmit
Filter block Filter block upsampling upsampling
factor factor 50 specifies the 50 specifies the
duration of a symbol duration of a symbol
T T
b b
= = 50 x 20 50 x 20 sec = sec =
1000 1000 sec = 1 msec, sec = 1 msec,
where where 20 20 sec is the sec is the
Simulink Simulink simulation simulation
time. The time. The filter gain filter gain of 5 of 5
sets the peak amplitude sets the peak amplitude
to to 5 V. 5 V.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink sinc PAM transmitter can be used sinc PAM transmitter can be used
to verify the PSD to verify the PSD. .
MS Figure 2.19 MS Figure 2.19
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PSD of sinc PAM, PSD of sinc PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
PSD of rectangular PAM, PSD of rectangular PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
first null bandwidth first null bandwidth r r
b b
/2 = 500 Hz /2 = 500 Hz
first null bandwidth first null bandwidth r r
b b
= 1000 Hz = 1000 Hz
sinc sinc
2 2
shaped PSD shaped PSD
non non- -ideal ideal sinc(t sinc(t) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PSD of sinc PAM, PSD of sinc PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
PSD of rectangular PAM, PSD of rectangular PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
relatively flat PSD relatively flat PSD
sinc sinc
2 2
shaped PSD shaped PSD
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The performance of practical sinc PAM in a simple The performance of practical sinc PAM in a simple
receiver (single point sampling at receiver (single point sampling at T T
b b
) in AWGN is ) in AWGN is
assessed by the assessed by the bit error rate bit error rate (BER) (BER)
The The M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink simulation of binary sinc simulation of binary sinc
PAM is used to assess performance. PAM is used to assess performance.
MS Figure 2.20 MS Figure 2.20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The sinc PAM transmitter is included as a The sinc PAM transmitter is included as a Simulink Simulink
subsystem subsystem. .
MS Figure 2.20 MS Figure 2.20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The The M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink simulation of binary sinc simulation of binary sinc
PAM includes a Chebyshev low PAM includes a Chebyshev low- -pass filter (LPF) with pass filter (LPF) with
f f
cutoff cutoff
= 600 Hz to improve BER performance. The = 600 Hz to improve BER performance. The
bandwidth is bandwidth is r r
b b
/2 = 500 Hz, /2 = 500 Hz, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec here. = 1 kb/sec here.
MS Figure 2.20 MS Figure 2.20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The The signal power signal power of the practical sinc PAM is of the practical sinc PAM is
problematical because of the complex shape and finite problematical because of the complex shape and finite
duration. A duration. A Simulink Simulink simulation can be used to compute simulation can be used to compute
the root the root- -mean mean- -square ( square (RMS RMS) of the sinc PAM transmit ) of the sinc PAM transmit
output. output.
MS Figure 2.21 MS Figure 2.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The The Simulink Simulink RMS RMS
block from the block from the
Signal Processing Signal Processing
Blockset Blockset, , Statistics Statistics
computes computes the RMS. the RMS.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The measured normalized power of the practical sinc The measured normalized power of the practical sinc
PAM signal is [RMS] PAM signal is [RMS]
2 2
= 4.934 = 4.934
2 2
= 24.3 W. The = 24.3 W. The
normalized power of the rectangular PAM signal is 25 normalized power of the rectangular PAM signal is 25
W exactly. The sinc PAM power is required for the W exactly. The sinc PAM power is required for the
computation of SNR in the BER analysis. computation of SNR in the BER analysis.
MS Figure 2.21 MS Figure 2.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Sinc PAM performance in a simple receiver with AWGN Sinc PAM performance in a simple receiver with AWGN
(MS p. 31 (MS p. 31- -33) 33)
Table 2.4 Table 2.4 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an
LPF (9 LPF (9- -pole Chebyshev, 0.1 dB ripple, pole Chebyshev, 0.1 dB ripple, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 600 Hz) = 600 Hz)
Binary Sinc PAM Digital Communication System, Binary Sinc PAM Digital Communication System,
Normalized Signal Power Normalized Signal Power 24.3 W. 24.3 W.
SNR dB SNR dB AWGN AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
0 0 0 0
0.85 0.85 20 20 0 0
3.13 3.13 50 50 4 4 10 10
- -3 3
6.14 6.14 100 100 3.5 3.5 10 10
- -3 3
9.15 9.15 200 200 2.14 2.14 10 10
- -2 2
13.13 13.13 500 500 9.31 9.31 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Comparison of BER performance in binary sinc and Comparison of BER performance in binary sinc and
rectangular PAM with an LPF receiver: rectangular PAM with an LPF receiver:
Sinc PAM Sinc PAM
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
6.14 6.14 100 100 3.5 3.5 10 10
- -2 2
9.15 9.15 200 200 2.14 2.14 10 10
- -2 2
Rectangular PAM Rectangular PAM
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
6.02 6.02 100 100 6.3 6.3 10 10
- -3 3
9.03 9.03 200 200 3.62 3.62 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
Pulse Shaping to Improve Pulse Shaping to Improve
Spectral Efficiency: Raised Cosine Spectral Efficiency: Raised Cosine
Pulses Pulses
Pages Pages 101 101- -111 111
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The raised cosine PAM pulse has a finite duration by The raised cosine PAM pulse has a finite duration by
definition. Zero definition. Zero- -crossings occur at crossings occur at n / n / r r
b b
= = n n T T
b b
binary 0 binary 0
binary 1 binary 1
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
1/ 1/r r
b b
8 8/ /r r
b b
3/ 3/r r
b b
+5 V +5 V
5 V 5 V
0 0
4/ 4/r r
b b
2/ 2/r r
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Bandwidth of a raised cosine pulse is Bandwidth of a raised cosine pulse is r r
b b
/ 2 + / 2 + Hz where Hz where
is the damping factor is the damping factor and 0 0 r r
b b
/ 2. / 2.
binary 0 binary 0
binary 1 binary 1
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
1/ 1/r r
b b
8 8/ /r r
b b
3/ 3/r r
b b
+5 V +5 V
5 V 5 V
0 0
4/ 4/r r
b b
2/ 2/r r
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The rolloff factor The rolloff factor of a raised cosine pulse is related to of a raised cosine pulse is related to
the damping factor the damping factor : : = 2 = 2 / / r r
b b
0 0 1 1
= = r r
b b
/ 2 / 2 0 0 r r
b b
/ 2 / 2
binary 0 binary 0
binary 1 binary 1
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
1/ 1/r r
b b
8 8/ /r r
b b
3/ 3/r r
b b
+5 V +5 V
5 V 5 V
0 0
4/ 4/r r
b b
2/ 2/r r
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Since the raised cosine pulses have Since the raised cosine pulses have zero zero- -crossings crossings at at
multiples of 1 / multiples of 1 / r r
b b
= = T T
b b
there is there is no interference no interference between between
adjacent pulses if sampled at adjacent pulses if sampled at T T
b b
. .
MS Figures 2.25 and 2.26 MS Figures 2.25 and 2.26
startup startup
binary 1 binary 1
binary 0 binary 0
1/ 1/r r
b b
sampling points at n sampling points at nT T
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Raised Cosine PAM Power Spectral Density (S&M p. 102, Raised Cosine PAM Power Spectral Density (S&M p. 102,
MS p. 36 MS p. 36- -38) 38)
The normalized power spectral density (PSD) The normalized power spectral density (PSD) G(f G(f) for a ) for a
raised cosine PAM signal is derived from the energy raised cosine PAM signal is derived from the energy
spectral density (ESD) for a single raised cosine pulse spectral density (ESD) for a single raised cosine pulse
with a peak amplitude A and data rate with a peak amplitude A and data rate r r
b b
= 1 / = 1 / T T
b b
is: is:
G(f G(f) = A ) = A
2 2
/ / r r
b b
| f | | f | r r
b b
/ 2 / 2
G(f G(f) = 4 A ) = 4 A
2 2
T T
b b
[1 + cos { [1 + cos { / 2 / 2 ( | f | ( | f | r r
b b
/2 + /2 + ) } ] ) } ]
2 2
r r
b b
/ 2 / 2 f f r r
b b
/2 + /2 +
G(f G(f) = 0 ) = 0 | f | | f | r r
b b
/ 2 + / 2 +
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Raised Cosine Pulse Amplitude Raised Cosine Pulse Amplitude
Modulation Modulation
Pages 81 Pages 81- -87 87
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink generation of raised cosine PAM generation of raised cosine PAM
signal uses the signal uses the impulse response impulse response of a of a filter filter (MS p. 33 (MS p. 33- -36). 36).
impulse train impulse train
data source data source
raised cosine impulse filter raised cosine impulse filter
MS Figure 2.22 MS Figure 2.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The Random Integer Generator block data has an The Random Integer Generator block data has an
amplitude of amplitude of 0, 1 0, 1 V and a period of 1 msec (1/ V and a period of 1 msec (1/r r
b b
). The ). The
output is offset and scaled to provide a output is offset and scaled to provide a 1 V data 1 V data
source. source.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The Pulse Generator The Pulse Generator
block has an amplitude of block has an amplitude of
1 V, a period of 1 msec or 1 V, a period of 1 msec or
a frequency of 1 kHz a frequency of 1 kHz
( (r r
b b
) and a pulse width of 2% ) and a pulse width of 2%
of the period (20 of the period (20 sec) sec)
which is the which is the Simulink Simulink
simulation time simulation time. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Simulink Simulink Comm Comm Filters Filters in the in the Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset provides the Raised Cosine Transmit Filter provides the Raised Cosine Transmit Filter
which g which generates a enerates a
raised raised cosine filter cosine filter
when th when the e rolloff factor rolloff factor
0 < 0 < 1 1 ( ( 0) 0)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Raised Cosine Transmit Raised Cosine Transmit
Filter block is generated Filter block is generated
with a with a rolloff factor rolloff factor = 0.5 = 0.5
The The group delay group delay of 4 of 4
symbols specifies the symbols specifies the
4 4T T
b b
duration. duration.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink raised cosine PAM transmitter raised cosine PAM transmitter
can be used to verify the PSD can be used to verify the PSD. .
MS Figure 2.22 MS Figure 2.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PSD of sinc PAM, PSD of sinc PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, = 1 kb/sec, = 0 = 0
PSD of raised cosine PAM, PSD of raised cosine PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, = 1 kb/sec, = 0.5, = 0.5, = 250 = 250
first null bandwidth first null bandwidth r r
b b
/2 = 500 Hz /2 = 500 Hz
first null bandwidth first null bandwidth r r
b b
/2 + /2 + = 750 Hz = 750 Hz
= 2 = 2 / / r r
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
PSD of raised cosine PAM, PSD of raised cosine PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, = 1 kb/sec, = 0.5, = 0.5, = 250 = 250
PSD of rectangular PAM, PSD of rectangular PAM, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
first null bandwidth r first null bandwidth r
b b
= 1000 Hz = 1000 Hz
first null bandwidth first null bandwidth r r
b b
/2 + /2 + = 750 Hz = 750 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The performance of raised cosine PAM in a simple The performance of raised cosine PAM in a simple
receiver (single point sampling at receiver (single point sampling at T T
b b
) in AWGN is ) in AWGN is
assessed by the assessed by the bit error rate bit error rate (BER) (BER)
The The Simulink Simulink simulation of binary raised cosine PAM simulation of binary raised cosine PAM
is used to assess performance. is used to assess performance.
MS Figure 2.28 MS Figure 2.28
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The The M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink simulation of raised cosine simulation of raised cosine
PAM includes a Chebyshev low PAM includes a Chebyshev low- -pass filter (LPF) pass filter (LPF) f f
cutoff cutoff
= =
900 Hz, in 900 Hz, in- -band ripple = 0.1 dB to improve BER band ripple = 0.1 dB to improve BER
performance. The first null bandwidth is 750 Hz. performance. The first null bandwidth is 750 Hz.
MS Figure 2.28 MS Figure 2.28
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
The computed normalized power of the raised cosine The computed normalized power of the raised cosine
PAM signal is [RMS] PAM signal is [RMS]
2 2
= 4.67 = 4.67
2 2
= 21.8 W. The normalized = 21.8 W. The normalized
power of the sinc and rectangular PAM signals are 24.3 power of the sinc and rectangular PAM signals are 24.3
and 25 W. The raised cosine PAM power is required and 25 W. The raised cosine PAM power is required
for the computation of SNR in the BER analysis. for the computation of SNR in the BER analysis.
MS Figure 2.21rcos MS Figure 2.21rcos
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Raised cosine PAM performance in a simple receiver with Raised cosine PAM performance in a simple receiver with
AWGN (MS p. 38 AWGN (MS p. 38- -40) 40)
Table 2.5 Table 2.5 Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an Observed BER as a Function of SNR in an
LPF (9 LPF (9- -pole Chebyshev, 0.01 dB ripple, pole Chebyshev, 0.01 dB ripple, f f
cutoff cutoff
= 900 Hz) = 900 Hz)
Binary Raised Cosine PAM Digital Communication Binary Raised Cosine PAM Digital Communication
System, Normalized Signal Power System, Normalized Signal Power 21.8 W. 21.8 W.
SNR dB SNR dB AWGN AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
0 0 0 0
3.38 3.38 10 10 0 0
0.37 0.37 20 20 4 4 10 10
- -4 4
3.61 3.61 50 50 5.8 5.8 10 10
- -3 3
6.62 6.62 100 100 2.48 2.48 10 10
- -2 2
9.62 9.62 200 200 6.75 6.75 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Comparison of BER performance in binary sinc and Comparison of BER performance in binary sinc and
raised cosine PAM with an LPF receiver: raised cosine PAM with an LPF receiver:
Sinc PAM Sinc PAM
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER BER
3.13 3.13 50 50 4 4 10 10
- -4 4
9.15 9.15 200 200 2.14 2.14 10 10
- -2 2
Raised Cosine PAM Raised Cosine PAM
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN V V BER BER
3.61 3.61 50 50 5.8 5.8 10 10
- -2 2
9.62 9.62 200 200 6.75 6.75 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
End of Chapter 3
End of Chapter 3
Digital Baseband Modulation
Digital Baseband Modulation
Techniques
Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Probability of Bit Error Probability of Bit Error
Pages 124 Pages 124- -149 149
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Probability of Bit Error Probability of Bit Error
The low pass filtered and sampled PAM signal results in The low pass filtered and sampled PAM signal results in
an expression for the an expression for the probability of bit error probability of bit error P P
b b
(S&M p. (S&M p.
124 124- -127). 127). A A is the amplitude at the sampling point and is the amplitude at the sampling point and
is the attenuation of the channel (0 is the attenuation of the channel (0 1 1) )
P{ P{ ith ith bit in error } = P(b bit in error } = P(b
i i
= 0) P{ n = 0) P{ n
o o
[ (i [ (i- -1) 1)T T
b b
+ + T T
b b
/2 ] /2 ] < < A } A }
+ + P(b P(b
i i
= 1) P{ n = 1) P{ n
o o
[ (i [ (i- -1) 1)T T
b b
+ + T T
b b
/2 ] /2 ] A } A }
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Review of Probability and Stochastic Processes Review of Probability and Stochastic Processes
(S&M p. 127 (S&M p. 127- -132) 132)
Probability distribution function Probability distribution function F F
X X
(a) = P{ (a) = P{ X X = a } = a }
Probability density function Probability density function f f
X X
(x) = d F (x) = d F
X X
(x) / (x) / dx dx
Mean (or expected value) Mean (or expected value)
X X
= = x x f f
X X
(x) (x) dx dx

Variance Variance
X X
2 2
= = (x (x
X X
) f f
X X
(x) (x) dx dx

E E { ( { (X X
X X
)
2 2
} }
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Review of Probability and Stochastic Processes Review of Probability and Stochastic Processes
(S&M p. 127 (S&M p. 127- -132) 132)
Joint probability Joint probability
distribution function distribution function F F
X,Y X,Y
(a (a, b) = P{ , b) = P{ X X = a and = a and Y Y = b } = b }
Joint probability Joint probability
density function density function f f
X,Y X,Y
(x, y)) = (x, y)) =
2 2
F F
X,Y X,Y
(x, y) / (x, y) / x x y y
Conditional probabilities Conditional probabilities P { P { X X > a and event Z } = > a and event Z } =
P { event Z } P{ X > a | event Z } P { event Z } P{ X > a | event Z }
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Examining Thermal Noise Examining Thermal Noise
Pages 132 Pages 132- -136 136
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Johnson Johnson Nyquist noise Nyquist noise or or thermal noise thermal noise is the is the electronic electronic
noise noise generated by the thermal agitation of the charge generated by the thermal agitation of the charge
carriers (usually the carriers (usually the electrons electrons) inside an ) inside an electrical electrical
conductor conductor at equilibrium at equilibrium.
This thermal noise was first measured by This thermal noise was first measured by John B. Johnson John B. Johnson
at at Bell Labs Bell Labs in in 1928 1928. He described his findings to . He described his findings to Harry Harry
Nyquist Nyquist, also at Bell Labs, who was able to explain the , also at Bell Labs, who was able to explain the
results. results.
1984-1995
Harry Nyquist Harry Nyquist
1889 1889- -1976 1976
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Thermal (or Gaussian) noise is approximately Thermal (or Gaussian) noise is approximately white white, ,
meaning that the meaning that the power spectral density power spectral density is equal is equal
throughout the throughout the frequency spectrum frequency spectrum. Additionally, the . Additionally, the
amplitude of the signal has very nearly a amplitude of the signal has very nearly a Gaussian Gaussian
probability density function probability density function with mean with mean
n n
= 0. = 0.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -3 3

n n
= 0 = 0
n n
= 1 = 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Since thermal noise has a Since thermal noise has a Gaussian Gaussian probability density probability density
function function the probability that a noise voltage the probability that a noise voltage n(t n(t) at time t ) at time t
o o
will be will be less than or equal to a threshold less than or equal to a threshold A is (S&M Eq. A is (S&M Eq.
4.27): 4.27):
and the probability that and the probability that a a noise voltage noise voltage n(t n(t) at time t ) at time t
o o
will be will be greater than a threshold greater than a threshold A A is (S&M Eq. 4.28): is (S&M Eq. 4.28):
) (

(

(

A
2
n
o X
2
n
n
(x - ) 1
P{ n(t A } = F A) = exp dx
2
2
) (

(
>
(

2
n
o X
2
n
A n
(x - ) 1
P{ n(t A } = 1 F A) = exp dx
2
2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The probabilistic properties of The probabilistic properties of
thermal noise do not change with thermal noise do not change with
time ( time (stationarity stationarity). Thermal noise ). Thermal noise
is an is an insidious property insidious property of of
communication systems that limits communication systems that limits
the speed of reliable data transmission the speed of reliable data transmission
and the detection of weak signals. and the detection of weak signals.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
A A M MATLAB ATLAB and and Simulink Simulink simulation verifies the spectral simulation verifies the spectral
characteristics of thermal noise and the performance of characteristics of thermal noise and the performance of
low low- -pass filtered pass filtered f f
cutoff cutoff
= 11.25 kHz thermal noise. = 11.25 kHz thermal noise.
MS Figure 1.11 MS Figure 1.11
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Thermal noise PSD = Thermal noise PSD = N N
o o
, | f | , | f | MS Figure 1.12 MS Figure 1.12
Thermal noise LPF PSD = Thermal noise LPF PSD = N N
o o
, | f | < 11.25 kHz , | f | < 11.25 kHz
N N
o o
N
o
N N
o o
(single (single- -sided spectrum) sided spectrum)
11.25 kHz 11.25 kHz
N
o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Thermal noise PSD = Thermal noise PSD = N N
o o
, | f | , | f | MS Figure 1.12 MS Figure 1.12
Thermal noise autocorrelation MS Figure 1.14 Thermal noise autocorrelation MS Figure 1.14
uncorrelated
uncorrelated
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Thermal noise LPF PSD = Thermal noise LPF PSD = N N
o o
, | f | < 11.25 kHz , | f | < 11.25 kHz
LPF thermal noise autocorrelation MS Figure 1.14 LPF thermal noise autocorrelation MS Figure 1.14
uncorrelated
correlated
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Simulink Simulink Histogram block from Histogram block from the the Statistics, Signal Statistics, Signal
Processing Processing Blockset Blockset is analogous to the is analogous to the pdf. pdf. The Vector The Vector
Scope block from the Scope block from the Sinks, Signal Processing Sinks, Signal Processing Blockset Blockset, ,
displays the histogram. displays the histogram. Simulink Simulink blocks to calculate the blocks to calculate the
mean mean and variance and variance
2 2
are in are in Statistics. Statistics.
NoiseHistogram.mdl NoiseHistogram.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Thermal noise histogram display Thermal noise histogram display
LPF LPF f f
cutoff cutoff
= 1 kHz thermal noise histogram display = 1 kHz thermal noise histogram display
Gaussian pdf Gaussian pdf
pdf remains pdf remains
Gaussian Gaussian
after LPF after LPF
= 10 = 10

2 2
= 1 = 1
= 10.42 = 10.42

o o
2 2
= 0.64 = 0.64
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
LPF thermal noise has an average normalized power: LPF thermal noise has an average normalized power:

o o
2 2
= = N N
o o
f f
cutoff cutoff
(S&M p. 135) (S&M p. 135)
The probability that the The probability that the ith ith- -bit is received in error is: bit is received in error is:
) )

<
(
(

(
(

i o i o
A
2
o
i
2
o
o
2
o
i
2
o
A o
P(b = 0) P{ n(t A } + P(b = 1) P{ n(t A } =
(x - ) 1
P(b = 0) exp dx +
2
2
(x - ) 1
P(b = 1) exp dx
2
2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
If and only if If and only if the binary thresholds are symmetrical ( the binary thresholds are symmetrical ( A A
and and A), A), the the P(b P(b
i i
= 0) + = 0) + P(b P(b
i i
= 1) = 1 and the Gaussian = 1) = 1 and the Gaussian
normal normal pdfs pdfs are are symmetrical symmetrical the the probability that the probability that the ith ith- -bit bit
is received in error becomes (S&M p. 136): is received in error becomes (S&M p. 136):
) )

<
(
(

i o i o
2
o
2
o
A o
P(b =0) P{ n(t A } + P(b = 1) P{ n(t A } =
(x - ) 1
exp dx
2
2
A -A
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Gaussian Probability Gaussian Probability
Density Function, Probability of Density Function, Probability of
Bit Error Bit Error
Pages 137 Pages 137- -149 149
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian (normal) Gaussian (normal)
probability probability
density density
function (pdf) function (pdf)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian (normal) Gaussian (normal)
probability probability
distribution distribution
function function
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian (Normal) Probability Distribution Gaussian (Normal) Probability Distribution
Abraham de Abraham de Moivre Moivre was a was a Fre French nch
mathematician mathematician famous for famous for de de Moivre's Moivre's
formula formula, which links , which links complex numbers complex numbers
and and trigonometry trigonometry, and for his work on , and for his work on
the the normal distribution normal distribution and and probability probability
theory theory in 1734. He wrote a book on in 1734. He wrote a book on
probability theory probability theory entitled entitled The Doctrine The Doctrine
of Chances of Chances which was said to be highly which was said to be highly
prized by gamblers. 166 prized by gamblers. 1667 7- -1754 1754
Gauss Gauss rigorously justified and extended the work in rigorously justified and extended the work in 1809 1809. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian (Normal) Probability Distribution Gaussian (Normal) Probability Distribution
Johann Carl Friedrich Gauss was a Johann Carl Friedrich Gauss was a
German German mathematician mathematician and and scientist scientist
who contributed significantly to many who contributed significantly to many
fields, including fields, including number theory number theory, ,
geometry geometry, , electrostatics electrostatics, , astronomy astronomy
and and optics optics. .
1777 1777- -1855 1855
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian Gaussian pdfs pdfs
= 0, = 0, = 1 = 1
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -6a 6a
= 1.6, = 1.6, = 1 = 1
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -6b 6b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Gaussian Gaussian pdfs pdfs
= 0, = 0, = 2 = 2
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -6c 6c
= 1, = 1, = 2 = 2
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -6d 6d
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The probability of bit error probability of bit error is the is the area area under the Gaussian under the Gaussian
pdf from the threshold pdf from the threshold a a to to which could be tabulated. which could be tabulated.
However, the probability of bit error is determined by three However, the probability of bit error is determined by three
independent variables ( independent variables (a a, , and and ) and this would be an ) and this would be an
unwieldy table. unwieldy table.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -7 7
Q-function
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Rather, construct a Rather, construct a single table single table with with =0 and =0 and = 1 for the = 1 for the
probability of bit error as the area under the Gaussian probability of bit error as the area under the Gaussian
pdf as a function of the threshold pdf as a function of the threshold a a only which is known as only which is known as
the the complementary error complementary error or or Q Q- -function function. .
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -7 7
Q-function
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The
Q Q- -function function
for for =0 =0
and and = 1 = 1
as a function as a function
of the of the
threshold a threshold a
is listed in is listed in
Table 4 Table 4- -1 1
(S&M (S&M
p. 141) and p. 141) and
Appendix B Appendix B
(MS p. 185 (MS p. 185- -
186) 186)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Reading the Reading the
Q Q- -functio function n
table table
correctly correctly
What is What is
Q(1.82)? Q(1.82)?
What is What is
Q(2.63)? Q(2.63)?
What is What is
Q(3.18)? Q(3.18)?
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Reading the Reading the
Q Q- -functio function n
table table
correctly correctly
Q(1.82) = Q(1.82) =
0.0344 0.0344
Q(2.63) = Q(2.63) =
0.0043 0.0043
Q(3.18) = Q(3.18) =
0.0007 0.0007
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
What if What if 0? It can 0? It can
be shown that the be shown that the
Q Q- -function table function table
remains valid if remains valid if
the threshold the threshold
variable in the table variable in the table
is changed from is changed from a a
to to a a . Note that . Note that
the areas under the the areas under the
Gaussian Gaussian pdfs pdfs are the are the
same. same.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -8a 8a
Figure 4 Figure 4- -8b 8b
a a
a
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
What if What if 0 and 0 and
1? It can also 1? It can also
be shown that the be shown that the
Q Q- -function table function table
remains valid if remains valid if
the threshold the threshold
variable in the table variable in the table
is first changed from is first changed from
a a to to a a and and
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -9a 9a
Figure 4 Figure 4- -9b 9b
a a
a
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
then the threshold then the threshold
variable in the variable in the
Q Q- -function table function table
is changed from is changed from
a a to ( to (a a ) / ) / . .
Note that argument Note that argument
on the on the x x- -axis axis is is
compressed by compressed by
and the and the y y- -axis axis is is
expanded by expanded by . .
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -9b 9b
Figure 4 Figure 4- -9c 9c
a a
(a ) /
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
For simple baseband PAM the probability of bit error For simple baseband PAM the probability of bit error P P
b b
is is
expressed by the Q expressed by the Q- -function: function:
| |
|
|
|
|
|
\ .
noise margin of
sampled value
= Q
average normalized noise power at
the input to the single point sampler
b
P
binary rectangular PAM data with AWGN binary rectangular PAM data with AWGN
sampling at sampling at
T T
b b
/2 /2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Optimal Receiver: The Matched Optimal Receiver: The Matched
Filter or Correlation Receiver Filter or Correlation Receiver
Pages 149 Pages 149- -161 161
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The simple baseband PAM receiver structure is: The simple baseband PAM receiver structure is:
But is this the But is this the best that there is best that there is? What about sampling an ? What about sampling an
odd number odd number of times (like 3) during each bit time of times (like 3) during each bit time T T
b b
? ?
T T
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Although sampling can be increased to a very large, odd Although sampling can be increased to a very large, odd
number of samples during number of samples during T T
b b
, there is an , there is an optimal way optimal way: :
Since LPF in PAM improved performance, assume that Since LPF in PAM improved performance, assume that
the optimal processing is a the optimal processing is a linear filter linear filter H(f H(f) (S&M p. 150) ) (S&M p. 150)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
After development (S&M p. 150 After development (S&M p. 150- -153) the optimal 153) the optimal
processing is a linear filter processing is a linear filter H H
o o
(f (f) )
The optimal linear filter The optimal linear filter H H
o o
(f (f) has an impulse response ) has an impulse response
h h
o o
(t (t) and is known as a ) and is known as a matched filter matched filter since the processing since the processing
is matched to input signal is matched to input signal s(t s(t): ):

o
-1 -1
o o
o
H (f) = k S (f) exp( j 2 f i )
h (t) = F { H (f) } = k F { S (f) exp( j 2 f i ) }
h (t) = k s(i t)
b
b
b
T
T
T impulse response impulse response
matched matched to to s(t s(t) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The impulse response of the optimum filter The impulse response of the optimum filter h h
o o
(t (t) is a ) is a
scaled (by scaled (by k k), time delayed (by i ), time delayed (by iT T
b b
) and time reversed ) and time reversed
(function of i (function of iT T
b b
t): t):

o b
h (t) = k s(iT t)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
When optimum processing is used the argument inside When optimum processing is used the argument inside
the Q the Q- -function is maximized (S&M p. 153 function is maximized (S&M p. 153- -154) and the 154) and the
probability of bit error probability of bit error P P
b b
is: is:
where where E E
b b
is the is the energy per bit energy per bit of the received signal. of the received signal.

| |

|
|
\ .
| |
|
|
\ .
| |
|
|
\ .
p
2
2
p
o
| r(i ) h(i ) |
= Q maximum
| r(i ) * h(i ) |
= Q maximum

2
= Q
b b
b
b b
b
b
b
T T
P
T T
P
E
P
N
S&M Eq. 4.58 S&M Eq. 4.58
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum filter The optimum filter H H
o o
(f (f) is equivalent to the ) is equivalent to the correlation correlation
receiver receiver (S&M p. 155 (S&M p. 155- -156). 156).
Optimum Filter Optimum Filter
o
h (t) = k s(i t)
b
T
Correlation Receiver Correlation Receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Since the optimum filter Since the optimum filter H H
o o
(f (f) and the correlation receiver ) and the correlation receiver
are equivalent, with s are equivalent, with s
1 1
(t) = (t) = s(t s(t) for a matched filter and ) for a matched filter and
r(t r(t) = ) = s(t s(t) where ) where is the communication channel is the communication channel
attenuation, attenuation, the energy the energy- -per per- -bit bit E E
b b
is (S&M p. 156, is (S&M p. 156,
Eq 4.62): Eq 4.62):

i i
2 2
(i-1) (i-1)
= s(t) s(t) dt = s (t) dt
b b
b b
T T
b
T T
E
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The expected or mean value The expected or mean value a a
i i
(i (iT T
b b
) is the output of the ) is the output of the
correlation receiver when correlation receiver when r(t r(t) = ) = s s
i i
(t (t) and ) and n(t n(t) = 0 where ) = 0 where
is the communication channel attenuation. is the communication channel attenuation.

i
i i 1
(i-1)
a (i ) = s (t) s (t) dt
b
b
T
b
T
T
S&M Eq. 4.67 S&M Eq. 4.67
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
P P
b b
= Q( = Q( (2 (2 E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
) ) and the ratio ) ) and the ratio E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
can be can be
expressed in dB: 10 log expressed in dB: 10 log
10 10
( (E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
). The resulting plot of ). The resulting plot of
P P
b b
verses verses E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
in in dB is a characteristic of dB is a characteristic of binary binary
symmetric symmetric
PAM with PAM with
AWGN. AWGN.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -14 14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Symmetric binary PAM Symmetric binary PAM
implies that the two implies that the two
transmitted signals for transmitted signals for
binary 1 and binary 0 binary 1 and binary 0
s(t s(t) ) and the resulting and the resulting
outputs outputs a(iT a(iT
b b
) ) from the from the
correlation receiver correlation receiver
are equal in are equal in
magnitude but magnitude but
opposite in sign: opposite in sign:
s s
bi bi=1 =1
(t) = (t) = s s
bi bi=0 =0
(t) (t)
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -15 15
Threshold = 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The probability of bit The probability of bit
error for error for equally equally- -likely likely
binary symmetric binary symmetric
PAM is the sum of PAM is the sum of
the the error regions error regions
shown. shown.
P(b P(b
i i
=0) = =0) = P(b P(b
i i
=1) = 0.5 =1) = 0.5
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -16 16
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The binary PAM signals are symmetrical and the The binary PAM signals are symmetrical and the
threshold is 0 ( threshold is 0 (equidistant equidistant from the means or expected from the means or expected
values values a(i a(iT T
b b
) ) ) ). The error regions are equal in area. . The error regions are equal in area.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -16 16
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The probability of bit The probability of bit
error does not error does not
minimize if the minimize if the
correlation receiver correlation receiver
threshold is threshold is
misadjusted misadjusted ( ( 0). 0).
With a misadjusted With a misadjusted
threshold the apriori threshold the apriori
probabilities are now probabilities are now
important since the important since the
area of the error area of the error
regions are no longer regions are no longer
equal. equal.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -17 17
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The correlation receiver is also known as the The correlation receiver is also known as the integrate integrate- -
and and- -dump dump which describes the process. which describes the process.
matched filter or matched filter or
correlation receiver correlation receiver
MS Figure 2.29 MS Figure 2.29
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 3
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Optimum Binary Baseband Optimum Binary Baseband
Receiver: The Correlation Receiver: The Correlation
Receiver Receiver
Pages 40 Pages 40- -41 41
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The correlation receiver can be simulated in The correlation receiver can be simulated in Simulink Simulink: :
MS Figure 2.29 MS Figure 2.29
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink
Integrate and Dump Integrate and Dump
block is in the block is in the
Comm Comm Filters, Filters,
Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The parameters of the The parameters of the Simulink Simulink Integrate and Dump Integrate and Dump
block are the integration period and offset in simulation block are the integration period and offset in simulation
samples. samples.
f f
simulation simulation
= 50 kHz = 50 kHz
T T
simulation simulation
= 1/ = 1/f f
simulation simulation
= =
0.02 msec 0.02 msec
T T
b b
= 1 msec = 1 msec
Integration period = Integration period =
T T
b b
/ /T T
simulatio simulation n
= 1/ 0.02 = = 1/ 0.02 =
50 samples 50 samples
Offset = 0 samples Offset = 0 samples
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The complete binary symmetrical rectangular PAM digital The complete binary symmetrical rectangular PAM digital
communication system with BER analysis and optimum communication system with BER analysis and optimum
receiver. receiver.
MS Figure 2.30 MS Figure 2.30
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
BER BER
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Observed BER as a function of SNR for binary Observed BER as a function of SNR for binary
rectangular PAM in a LPF simple receiver ( rectangular PAM in a LPF simple receiver (LPF LPF) and the ) and the
optimum correlation receiver ( optimum correlation receiver (CR CR) with normalized signal ) with normalized signal
power = 25 W (MS Table 2.3 p. 27 and Table 2.6 p. 43). power = 25 W (MS Table 2.3 p. 27 and Table 2.6 p. 43).
SNR dB AWGN SNR dB AWGN
2 2
V V
2 2
BER ( BER (LPF LPF) ) BER ( BER (CR CR) )
0 0 0 0 0 0
3.98 3.98 10 10 0 0 0 0
0.96 0.96 20 20 0 0 0 0
3.52 3.52 50 50 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
0 0
6.02 6.02 100 100 6.3 6.3 10 10
- -3 3
1 1 10 10
- -4 4
9.03 9.03 200 200 3.63 3.63 10 10
- -2 2
6.4 6.4 10 10
- -3 3
13.01 13.01 500 500 1.185 1.185 10 10
- -1 1
6.02 6.02 10 10
- -2 2
16.02 16.02 1000 1000 1.345 1.345 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The energy per bit energy per bit E E
b b
= 2.5 = 2.5 10 10
- -2 2
V V
2 2
- -sec (S&M Eq. 4.62, sec (S&M Eq. 4.62,
p. 156) for rectangular p. 156) for rectangular 5 V 5 V PAM with the channel PAM with the channel
attenuation attenuation = 1: = 1:
The observed bit error rate (BER) can be compared to The observed bit error rate (BER) can be compared to
the theoretical probability of bit error the theoretical probability of bit error P P
b b
(S&M Eq. 4.58, p. (S&M Eq. 4.58, p.
154) to validate the basic simulation. 154) to validate the basic simulation.

i i
2 2
(i-1) (i-1)
= s(t) s(t) dt = s (t) dt
b b
b b
T T
b
T T
E
| |
|
|
\ .
2
= Q
b
b
o
E
P
N
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The ratio ratio of the energy per bit of the energy per bit E E
b b
to the noise power to the noise power
spectral density spectral density N N
o o
(E (E
b b
/ / N N
o o
) ) rather than the SNR is the rather than the SNR is the
conventional metric conventional metric used for BER performance. used for BER performance.

i i
2 2
(i-1) (i-1)
= s(t) s(t) dt = s (t) dt
b b
b b
T T
b
T T
E
| |
|
|
\ .
2
= Q
b
b
o
E
P
N
S&M Eq. 4.62 S&M Eq. 4.62
S&M Eq. 4.58 S&M Eq. 4.58
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The BER and The BER and P P
b b
comparison (MS Table 2.7, p. 44): comparison (MS Table 2.7, p. 44):
Table 2.7 Table 2.7 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a Binary Symmetrical Rectangular in a Binary Symmetrical Rectangular
PAM Digital Communication System with Optimum PAM Digital Communication System with Optimum
Receiver Receiver
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB BER dB BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
10 10 0 0 4.05 4.05 10 10
- -6 6
8 8 0 0 2.06 2.06 10 10
- -4 4
6 6 2.5 2.5 10 10
- -3 3
2.43 2.43 10 10
- -3 3
4 4 1.35 1.35 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 3.95 3.95 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 8.09 8.09 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Correlation Receiver for Asymmetric Correlation Receiver for Asymmetric
PAM, Optimum Thresholds, PAM, Optimum Thresholds,
Synchronization Synchronization
Pages 162 Pages 162- -173 173
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Asymmetric PAM Asymmetric PAM
signals do not have signals do not have
equal equal means or means or
expected values of expected values of
the output of the the output of the
correlation receiver: correlation receiver:
| a | a
2 2
(i (iT T
b b
) | ) | | a | a
1 1
(i (iT T
b b
) | ) |
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -19 19
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum The optimum
threshold threshold
opt opt
is is
again again equidistant equidistant
between the means between the means
or expected values of or expected values of
the output of the the output of the
correlation receiver: correlation receiver:
S&M Eq. 4.71 S&M Eq. 4.71
Here | a Here | a
2 2
(i (iT T
b b
) | + ) | +
opt opt
= a = a
1 1
(i (iT T
b b
) )
opt opt
and the threshold is and the threshold is
equidistant from the means or expected values. equidistant from the means or expected values.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -19 19

=
2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i )

2
b b
T T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
If the If the apriori apriori
probabilities probabilities are not are not
equal then the equal then the
optimum threshold optimum threshold

opt opt
is not equidistant is not equidistant
from the means or from the means or
expected value of expected value of
output of the output of the
correlation receiver. correlation receiver.
An asymmetric binary An asymmetric binary
PAM signal is shown: PAM signal is shown:
a a
2 2
(i (iT T
b b
) ) a a
1 1
(i (iT T
b b
) )
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -23 23
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum The optimum
threshold threshold
opt opt
where where
the apriori the apriori
probabilities are probabilities are
(1 (1 M M) and ) and M M
(which sums to 1) is: (which sums to 1) is:
if M = 0.5 then: if M = 0.5 then:
| |

=

2 2 2
o 2 1 b
opt
2 1
2 ln ( / (1 ) ) + a (i ) a (i )

2 a (i ) a (i )
b
b b
M M T T
T T

=
2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i )

2
b b
T T
S&M Eq. 4.85 S&M Eq. 4.85
S&M Eq. 4.71 S&M Eq. 4.71
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Asymmetric PAM with Asymmetric PAM with
an optimum threshold an optimum threshold

opt opt
has a probability has a probability
of bit error of bit error P P
b b
: :
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -19 19
| |
( )
{ }
2
2
2
| |

|
\ .
| |

|
|
|
\ .
| |

|
|
\ .

1 2
o
1 2
o
o
i
2
1 2
(i-1)
a (i ) a (i )
=Q
2
a (i ) a (i )
=Q =
4 2
=Q where = s (t) s (t) dt
2
b
b
b b
b
b b
o
b
T
d
b d
o
T
T T
P
T T
N
P
E
P E
N
S&M Eq. 4.78 S&M Eq. 4.78
and Eq. 4.79 and Eq. 4.79
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum correlation receiver for asymmetric binary The optimum correlation receiver for asymmetric binary
PAM uses the difference signal s PAM uses the difference signal s
1 1
(t) (t) s s
2 2
(t) as the (t) as the
reference: reference:
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -20 20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum correlation receiver can be The optimum correlation receiver can be reconfigured reconfigured as as
an an alternate alternate but but universal universal structure structure which can be used for which can be used for
both asymmetric or symmetric binary PAM signals: both asymmetric or symmetric binary PAM signals:
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -21 21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
If the If the apriori apriori
probabilities probabilities are not are not
equal then the equal then the
optimum threshold optimum threshold

opt opt
is not equidistant is not equidistant
from the means or from the means or
expected value of expected value of
output of the output of the
correlation receiver. correlation receiver.
An asymmetric binary An asymmetric binary
PAM signal is shown: PAM signal is shown:
a a
2 2
(i (iT T
b b
) ) a a
1 1
(i (iT T
b b
) )
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -23 23
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum The optimum
threshold threshold
opt opt
where where
the apriori the apriori
probabilities are probabilities are
(1 (1 M M) and ) and M M
(which sums to 1) is: (which sums to 1) is:
if M = 0.5 then: if M = 0.5 then:
| |

=

2 2 2
o 2 1
opt
2 1
2 ln ( / (1 ) ) + a (i ) a (i )

2 a (i ) a (i )
b b
b b
M M T T
T T

=
2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i )

2
b b
T T
S&M Eq. 4.85 S&M Eq. 4.85
S&M Eq. 4.71 S&M Eq. 4.71
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The probability The probability
of bit error of bit error P P
b b
then then
is is: :
S&M Eq. 4.86 S&M Eq. 4.86
( ) ( )

| | | |

| |
\ . \ .
| | | |

| |

| |
| |
\ . \ .
1 opt opt 2
o o
2 2
1 opt opt 2
a (i ) a (i )
= Q + (1 ) Q

a (i ) a (i )
= Q + (1 ) Q
2 2
b b
b
b b
b
o o
T T
P M M
T T
P M M
N N
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
If the apriori If the apriori
probabilities are probabilities are
equal ( equal (M M = 0.5): = 0.5):
and and P P
b b
becomes: becomes:
( ) ( )
( )
| | | |

| |
| |
| |
\ . \ .
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
1 opt opt 2
2
1 2
a (i ) a (i )
= 0.5 Q + 0.5 Q
2 2
a (i ) - a (i )
= Q = Q
2 2
b b
b
o o
b b
d
b
o o
T T
P
N N
T T
E
P
N N

=
2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i )

2
b b
T T
S&M p. 168 S&M p. 168
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -19 19
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The BER and P The BER and P
b b
comparison (MS Table 2.8, p. 49): comparison (MS Table 2.8, p. 49):
Table 2.8 Table 2.8 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
d d
/ N / N
o o
in an Asymmetrical Binary in an Asymmetrical Binary
Rectangular PAM Digital Communication System with Rectangular PAM Digital Communication System with
Optimum Receiver. Optimum Receiver.
E E
d d
/ N / N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 2.5 2.5 10 10
- -3 3
2.53 2.53 10 10
- -3 3
10 10 1.28 1.28 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
8 8 3.59 3.59 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
6 6 8.05 8.05 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 1.334 1.334 10 10
- -1 1
1.318 1.318 10 10
- -1 1
2 2 1.856 1.856 10 10
- -1 1
1.872 1.872 10 10
- -1 1
0 0 2.362 2.362 10 10
- -1 1
2.394 2.394 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Since for binary rectangular PAM Since for binary rectangular PAM E E
d d
= 4 = 4 E E
b b
(S&M p. 168) (S&M p. 168)
the BER performance for asymmetric PAM is comparable the BER performance for asymmetric PAM is comparable
to symmetric PAM if a to symmetric PAM if a E E
d d
/ N / N
o o
is is reduced reduced by 6 dB by 6 dB
(10 log (4) = 6) : (10 log (4) = 6) :
E E
d d
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
Asymmetric PAM Asymmetric PAM 10 10 1.28 1.28 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
(MS Table 2.8, (MS Table 2.8, 8 8 3.59 3.59 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
p. 49) p. 49) 6 6 8.05 8.05 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
Symmetric PAM Symmetric PAM 4 4 1.35 1.35 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
(MS Table 2.7, 2 (MS Table 2.7, 2 3.95 3.95 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
p. 44) p. 44) 0 0 8.09 8.09 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
The Correlation Receiver for The Correlation Receiver for
Baseband Asymmetrical Baseband Asymmetrical
Signals Signals
Pages 44 Pages 44- -47 47
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum threshold The optimum threshold
opt opt
requires the additive Gaussian requires the additive Gaussian
noise variance noise variance
2 2
as processed by the correlation as processed by the correlation
receiver or receiver or
o o
2 2
: :
| |

=

2 2 2
o 2 1
opt
2 1
2 ln ( / (1 ) ) + a (i ) a (i )

2 a (i ) a (i )
b b
b b
M M T T
T T
MS Figure 2.31 MS Figure 2.31

o o
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The optimum threshold The optimum threshold
opt opt
also also requires the apriori requires the apriori
probabilities P probabilities P
1 1
= = M M and P and P
0 0
= = M M 1 1: :
Here P Here P
1 1
= 0.4998 = = 0.4998 = M M and P and P
0 0
= 1 = 1 M M = = 0.5004 0.5004
| |

=

2 2 2
o 2 1
opt
2 1
2 ln ( / (1 ) ) + a (i ) a (i )

2 a (i ) a (i )
b b
b b
M M T T
T T
MS Figure 2.32 MS Figure 2.32
Mean Mean
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The Mean and The Mean and
Variance blocks Variance blocks
are in the are in the Statistics, Statistics,
Signal Processing Signal Processing
Blockset Blockset
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The parameter of the The parameter of the
Mean block can be set Mean block can be set
for for running mean running mean or an or an
average over the average over the
simulation period. The simulation period. The
result can be shown by result can be shown by
a Display block from the a Display block from the
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
MS Figure 2.32 MS Figure 2.32
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The parameter of the The parameter of the
Variance block can be set Variance block can be set
for for running variance running variance or an or an
average over the average over the
simulation period. The simulation period. The
result can be shown by result can be shown by
a Display block from the a Display block from the
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation for binary asymmetrical PAM simulation for binary asymmetrical PAM
with BER analysis has a with BER analysis has a threshold threshold adjustment based on adjustment based on
the estimate of the estimate of
opt opt
from measurements of from measurements of
o o
and and M. M.
MS Figure 2.33 MS Figure 2.33
Threshold Threshold
Reference Reference
| |

=

2 2 2
o 2 1
opt
2 1
2 ln ( / (1 ) ) + a (i ) a (i )

2 a (i ) a (i )
b b
b b
M M T T
T T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation for the alternative and universal simulation for the alternative and universal
structure for the correlation receiver: structure for the correlation receiver:
MS Figure 2.34 MS Figure 2.34
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -21 21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Synchronization (not considered here) provides Synchronization (not considered here) provides timing timing
recovery recovery or the exact beginning and end of a bit time or the exact beginning and end of a bit time T T
b b
: :
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -21 21
start of start of T T
b b
? ?
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Synchronization of both Synchronization of both symbol time symbol time and carrier frequency and carrier frequency
and phase is one of the advanced topics in EE4542 and phase is one of the advanced topics in EE4542
Telecommunications Engineering Telecommunications Engineering. The effect is called . The effect is called jitter jitter. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
Multi Multi- -level PAM (M level PAM (M- -ary PAM) ary PAM)
Pages 200 Pages 200- -206 206
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Multi Multi- -level (M level (M- -ary) PAM is another means to minimize the ary) PAM is another means to minimize the
bandwidth required for a data transmission rate bandwidth required for a data transmission rate r r
b b
b/sec. b/sec.
Rather than transmitting a binary signal in a bit time Rather than transmitting a binary signal in a bit time T T
b b
, ,
send a multi send a multi- -level (usually a power level (usually a power- -of of- -2) signal during the 2) signal during the
same period called the same period called the symbol time symbol time T T
S S
. .
A A multi multi- -state comparator state comparator determines the received symbol determines the received symbol
which is then decoded to the received bits. which is then decoded to the received bits.
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -48 48
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The three The three
optimum optimum
thresholds if thresholds if
the apriori the apriori
probabilities probabilities
are equally are equally
likely likely
(P (P
i i
= 0.25) = 0.25)
are: are:

=

=

=
1 2
opt1
2 3
opt2
3 4
opt3
a (i ) +a (i )

2
a (i ) +a (i )

2
a (i ) +a (i )

2
S S
S S
S S
T T
T T
T T
S&M Figure 4.49 S&M Figure 4.49
S&M Eq. 4.136 S&M Eq. 4.136
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The
probability probability
of symbol of symbol
error error P P
s s
, ,
where M = 2 where M = 2
n n
is the is the
number of number of
levels, levels,
can be can be
shown to be: shown to be:
where: where:
S&M Eq. 4.140 S&M Eq. 4.140
{ }
(

i
2
j k
(i-1)
= s (t) - s (t) dt
s
s
T
d,symbol
T
E
( )
| |

|
|
\ .
s
2 M 1
P = Q
M 2
d,symbol
o
E
N
S&M Eq. 4.139 S&M Eq. 4.139
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
There are There are
2 (M 2 (M 1) 1)
error error
regions regions
due to due to only only
adjacent adjacent
regions regions
being being
misinterpreted with M = 2 misinterpreted with M = 2
n n
equally probable symbols. The equally probable symbols. The
probability of occurrence probability of occurrence P P
j j
for a misinterpreted symbol is for a misinterpreted symbol is
also equally likely and is: also equally likely and is:
SVU Eq. 2.41 SVU Eq. 2.41
( )

j
1
P =
2 M 1
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The amplitudes of the M The amplitudes of the M- -ary (M = 4) rectangular PAM ary (M = 4) rectangular PAM
signal is signal is 3A and 3A and A. The energy difference for a A. The energy difference for a
symbol symbol E E
d,symbol d,symbol
= 4 = 4
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
S S
(S&M Eq. 4.140): (S&M Eq. 4.140):
The average received energy per symbol The average received energy per symbol E E
avg,symbol avg,symbol
= =
5 5
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
S S
(S&M Eq. 4.141) (S&M Eq. 4.141)
{ }
(

i
2
j k
(i-1)
= s (t) - s (t) dt
s
s
T
d,symbol
T
E
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -50 modified 50 modified
11
10
01
00
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Then Then E E
d,symbol d,symbol
= 0.4 = 0.4 E E
avg,symbol avg,symbol
and substitute (M = 4): and substitute (M = 4):
| |
|
|
\ .
s
0.4
3
P = Q
2
avg,symbol
o
E
N
| |
|
|
\ .
s

3
P = Q
2 2
d,symbol
o
E
N
S&M Eq. 4.139b S&M Eq. 4.139b
S&M Eq. 4.142a S&M Eq. 4.142a
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -50 modified 50 modified
11
10
01
00
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The average energy per bit The average energy per bit E E
b b
= 0.5 = 0.5 E E
avg,symbol avg,symbol
since M =4 since M =4
and there are two bits per symbol: and there are two bits per symbol:
| |
|
|
\ .
s
0.4
3
P = Q
2
avg,symbol
o
E
N
S&M Eq. 4.142a S&M Eq. 4.142a
S&M Eq. 4.142b S&M Eq. 4.142b
| |
|
|
\ .
s
0.8 3
P = Q
2
b
o
E
N
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -50 modified 50 modified
11
10
01
00
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The symbols transmitted can have 1 bit in error 4 / 6 of The symbols transmitted can have 1 bit in error 4 / 6 of
the time and 2 bits in error 2 / 6 of the time: the time and 2 bits in error 2 / 6 of the time:
Transmitted Di Transmitted Di- -Bit Bit Received Di Received Di- -Bit Bit Bits In Error Bits In Error
00 00 01 01 1 1
01 01 00 00 1 1
01 01 10 10 2 2
10 10 01 01 2 2
10 10 11 11 1 1
11 11 10 10 1 1
4 2
= P(1 of 2 bits in error) + P(2 of 2 bits in error)
6 6
4 1 2 2
= + =
6 2 6 3
b,4-level
b,4-level s s s
P
P P P P
S&M Eq. 4.143 S&M Eq. 4.143
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The probability of bit error The probability of bit error P P
b,4 b,4- -symbol symbol
= 2 = 2 P P
s s
/ 3 but can that / 3 but can that
be improved? Change the assignment of symbols to di be improved? Change the assignment of symbols to di- -
bits as a bits as a Gray code Gray code and there is only 1 bit in error for and there is only 1 bit in error for
each of the six error regions and each of the six error regions and P P
b,4 b,4- -symbol symbol
= = P P
s s
/ 2 / 2
Transmitted Di Transmitted Di- -Bit Bit Received Di Received Di- -Bit Bit Bits In Error Bits In Error
01 01 00 00 1 1
00 00 01 01 1 1
00 00 10 10 1 1
10 10 00 00 1 1
10 10 11 11 1 1
11 11 10 10 1 1
6
= P(1 of 2 bits in error)
6
6 1 1
= =
6 2 2
b,4-level
b,4-level s s
P
P P P
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The simple change to a Gray coded symbol The simple change to a Gray coded symbol improves improves the the
probability of bit error P probability of bit error P
b b
: :
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -50 50
11
10
00
01
| | | |
=
| |
| |
\ . \ .
| | | |
=
| |
| |
\ . \ .
0.8 0.8 2 3
= Q Q
3 2
0.8 0.8 1 3 3
= Q Q
2 2 4
b b
b
o o
b b
b
o o
E E
P
N N
E E
P
N N
Gray coded Gray coded
Straight binary Straight binary
coded coded
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Frank Gray was a researcher at Frank Gray was a researcher at Bell Lab Bell Labs who made s who made
numerous innovations in television and is remembered for numerous innovations in television and is remembered for
the the Gray code Gray code. The . The Gray code Gray code
appeared in his 1953 patent and appeared in his 1953 patent and
is a is a binary system binary system often used in often used in
electronics electronics. Gray also conducted . Gray also conducted
pioneering research on the pioneering research on the
development of development of television television. He . He
proposed an early form of the proposed an early form of the
flying spot flying spot scanning system for scanning system for
TV cameras in 1927, and helped TV cameras in 1927, and helped
develop a two develop a two- -way mechanically way mechanically
scanned TV system in 1930. scanned TV system in 1930.
Frank Gray Frank Gray
1894 1894- -1964 1964
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Multilevel (M Multilevel (M- -ary) Pulse ary) Pulse
Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Modulation
Pages 49 Pages 49- -55 55
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation of a 4 simulation of a 4- -level straight binary ( level straight binary (not not
Gray coded Gray coded) rectangular PAM system with BER analysis: ) rectangular PAM system with BER analysis:
MS Figure 2.35 MS Figure 2.35
bit to symbol converter bit to symbol converter symbol to bit converter symbol to bit converter
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
BER BER
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Although Although Simulink Simulink
provides a Bit to provides a Bit to
Integer Integer block block and and
an an Integer to Bit Integer to Bit
block from the block from the
Utility Blocks, Utility Blocks,
Communication Communication
Blockset Blockset, , these these
blocks use a blocks use a vector vector
of bits rather than of bits rather than
from and to a from and to a serial serial
bitstream bitstream. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
A bit to symbol converter A bit to symbol converter Simulink Simulink subsystem can be subsystem can be
configured from configured from Downsampler Downsampler blocks and a blocks and a Delay Delay block block
from the from the Signal Operations Signal Operations, , Signal Processing Signal Processing Blockset Blockset
and the and the Gain Gain and and Sum Sum blocks from the blocks from the Simulink Simulink, , Math Math
Operations Operations to to produce the 4 produce the 4- -level PAM signal (0, 1, 2 or level PAM signal (0, 1, 2 or
3) from the input 3) from the input di di- -bit bit (00, 01, 10, or 11) with the most (00, 01, 10, or 11) with the most
significant bit (MSB) first. significant bit (MSB) first.
MS Figure 2.36 MS Figure 2.36
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink bit to symbol converter can be easily bit to symbol converter can be easily
reconfigured reconfigured to to produce an 8 produce an 8- -level PAM signal (0, 1, 2, level PAM signal (0, 1, 2,
7) from the input 7) from the input tri tri- -bit bit (000, 001, (000, 001, 111) with the 111) with the
most significant bit (MSB) first. most significant bit (MSB) first.
MS Figure 2.37 MS Figure 2.37
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
A symbol to bit converter A symbol to bit converter Simulink Simulink subsystem can be subsystem can be
configured from configured from Constant Constant blocks, blocks, Pulse Generator Pulse Generator blocks blocks
and a and a Multiport Switch Multiport Switch block from the block from the Signal Routing Signal Routing, ,
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset to to produce the produce the di di- -bit bit ( (MSB first) from the MSB first) from the
4 4- -level PAM signal. level PAM signal.
MS Figure 2.40 MS Figure 2.40
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
A symbol to bit converter A symbol to bit converter Simulink Simulink subsystem can be subsystem can be
easily reconfigured easily reconfigured to to produce the produce the tri tri- -bit bit ( (MSB first) from MSB first) from
an 8 an 8- -level PAM signal. level PAM signal.
MS Figure 2.41 MS Figure 2.41
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Binary data to 4 Binary data to 4- -level PAM converter level PAM converter
MS Figure 2.36 MS Figure 2.36
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Transmit binary data, Transmit binary data, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
Transmit 4 Transmit 4- -level PAM signal, level PAM signal, r r
S S
= 500 symbols/sec = 500 symbols/sec
01 01
1 1
LSB LSB MSB MSB
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
M M- -ary PAM transmits n bits per symbol (M = 2 ary PAM transmits n bits per symbol (M = 2
n n
) but has the ) but has the
same rectangular pulse shape as binary PAM. The same rectangular pulse shape as binary PAM. The
normalized power spectral density for M normalized power spectral density for M- -ary PAM PSD ary PAM PSD
M M
has has
the same the same sinc sinc shape as that for binary PAM PSD shape as that for binary PAM PSD
B B
but uses but uses
the the symbol time symbol time T T
S S
rather than the rather than the bit time bit time T T
b b
: :
( )
( )
2
M avg
2
B
PSD (f) = A sinc f
PSD (f) = A sinc f
S S
b b
T T
T T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Observed BER and theoretical Observed BER and theoretical P P
b b
as a function of as a function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a 4 in a 4- -level level rectangular straight rectangular straight- -binary coded PAM digital binary coded PAM digital
communication system with optimum receiver communication system with optimum receiver (MS Table (MS Table
2.11 p. 58). 2.11 p. 58).
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
10 10 2.7 2.7 10 10
- -3 3
2.4 2.4 10 10
- -3 3
8 8 1.28 1.28 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
6 6 3.42 3.42 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 7.52 7.52 10 10
- -2 2
7.78 7.78 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 1.291 1.291 10 10
- -1 1
1.320 1.320 10 10
- -1 1
0 0 1.842 1.842 10 10
- -1 1
1.867 1.867 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M The M- -ary PAM PSD uses the average amplitude ary PAM PSD uses the average amplitude A A
avg avg
, ,
where where P P
j j
is the apriori probability of occurrence of the is the apriori probability of occurrence of the
amplitude amplitude A A
j j
. .
=

M
2 2
avg j j
j=1
A A P
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M The M- -ary (M = 4) PAM PSD can be determined by a ary (M = 4) PAM PSD can be determined by a
Simulink Simulink model model
Fig239.mdl Fig239.mdl
MS Figure 2.39 MS Figure 2.39
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation of a 4 simulation of a 4- -level straight binary ( level straight binary (not not
Gray coded Gray coded) rectangular PAM system measures the BER ) rectangular PAM system measures the BER
performance. performance.
MS Figure 2.35 MS Figure 2.35
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
BER BER
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The rectangular M The rectangular M- -ary pulse width ary pulse width is the entire is the entire symbol symbol
time time T T
S S
and is and is optimum optimum in the bandwidth sense. The in the bandwidth sense. The
bandwidth is similar to that for binary PAM but with bandwidth is similar to that for binary PAM but with T T
b b
= =
T T
S S
(cf. S&M Table 3 (cf. S&M Table 3- -1 p. 86). 1 p. 86).
Table 2 Table 2- -9 Bandwidth of a Binary Rectangular M 9 Bandwidth of a Binary Rectangular M- -ary PAM ary PAM
Signal as a Percentage of the Total Power (MS p. 53) Signal as a Percentage of the Total Power (MS p. 53)
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
1/ 1/T T
S S
90% 90%
1.5/ 1.5/T T
S S
93% 93%
2/ 2/T T
S S
95% 95%
3/ 3/T T
S S
96.5% 96.5%
4/ 4/T T
S S
97.5% 97.5%
5/ 5/T T
S S
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
PSD PSD
M M
M = 4, M = 4, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 500 Hz = 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 500 Hz
PSD PSD
B B
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 1 kHz = 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 1 kHz
500 Hz 500 Hz
1 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Baseband Modulation and
Baseband Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Performance of M Performance of M- -ary Pulse ary Pulse
Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Modulation
Gray Encoded Data Gray Encoded Data
Pages 57 Pages 57- -60 60
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation of a 4 simulation of a 4- -level straight binary level straight binary Gray Gray
encoded encoded rectangular PAM system with BER analysis: rectangular PAM system with BER analysis:
MS Figure 2.42 MS Figure 2.42
bit to Gray encoded bit to Gray encoded
symbol converter symbol converter
Gray encoded symbol Gray encoded symbol
to bit converter to bit converter
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
BER BER
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray encoded by The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray encoded by
a a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block from the from the Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
M = 4 symbol M = 4 symbol
bit to Gray encoded bit to Gray encoded
symbol converter symbol converter
MS Figure 2.43 MS Figure 2.43
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M = 4 level symbol The M = 4 level symbol
(0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray
encoded by a encoded by a Lookup Lookup
Table Block Table Block from the from the
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray encoded by The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray encoded by
a a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block by by mapping mapping [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2] [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2]
Gray coding 00 00
01 01
10 11
11 10
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M = 4 level Gray encoded symbol is decoded as di The M = 4 level Gray encoded symbol is decoded as di- -bits bits
by a by a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block from the from the Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
M = 4 symbol M = 4 symbol
Gray encoded symbol Gray encoded symbol
to bit converter to bit converter
MS Figure 2.44 MS Figure 2.44
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray decoded by The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray decoded by
a a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block by by mapping mapping [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2] [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2]
Gray coding 00 00
01 01
10 11
11 10
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
PSD PSD
M M
M = 4, M = 4, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 500 Hz = 1 kb/sec, first null bandwidth = 500 Hz
500 Hz 500 Hz
The PSD of a Gray coded rectangular PAM signal is the The PSD of a Gray coded rectangular PAM signal is the
same same as a straight as a straight- -binary rectangular PAM signal. The binary rectangular PAM signal. The
coding coding does not does not
change the PSD. change the PSD.
The PSD is only The PSD is only
affected by the affected by the pulse pulse
shape shape and and data rate data rate. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The The Simulink Simulink simulation of a 4 simulation of a 4- -level straight binary level straight binary Gray Gray
encoded encoded rectangular PAM system measures the BER rectangular PAM system measures the BER
performance. performance.
MS Figure 2.42 MS Figure 2.42
Transmitter Transmitter Receiver Receiver
BER BER
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Observed BER and theoretical Observed BER and theoretical P P
b b
as a function of as a function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a 4 in a 4- -level level rectangular Gray coded PAM digital rectangular Gray coded PAM digital
communication system with optimum receiver communication system with optimum receiver (MS Table (MS Table
2.12 p. 60). 2.12 p. 60).
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
10 10 1.7 1.7 10 10
- -3 3
1.8 1.8 10 10
- -3 3
8 8 8.6 8.6 10 10
- -3 3
9.3 9.3 10 10
- -3 3
6 6 2.92 2.92 10 10
- -2 2
2.81 2.81 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 5.93 5.93 10 10
- -2 2
5.84 5.84 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 9.56 9.56 10 10
- -2 2
9.90 9.90 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 1.441 1.441 10 10
- -1 1
1.404 1.404 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
Observed BER as a function of Observed BER as a function of E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
for binary for binary
rectangular PAM for straight rectangular PAM for straight- -binary coded ( binary coded (SBC SBC) and ) and
Gray coded (GC) data (MS Table 2.11 p. 58 and MS Gray coded (GC) data (MS Table 2.11 p. 58 and MS
Table 2.12 p. 60). Table 2.12 p. 60).
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER ( BER (SBC SBC) ) BER ( BER (GC GC) )
0 0 0 0
10 10 2.7 2.7 10 10
- -3 3
1.7 1.7 10 10
- -3 3
8 8 1.28 1.28 10 10
- -2 2
8.6 8.6 10 10
- -3 3
6 6 3.42 3.42 10 10
- -2 2
2.92 2.92 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 7.52 7.52 10 10
- -2 2
5.93 5.93 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 1.291 1.291 10 10
- -1 1
9.56 9.56 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 1.842 1.842 10 10
- -1 1
1.441 1.441 10 10
- -1 1
Although a slight improvement, Gray coding improves Although a slight improvement, Gray coding improves
BER performance without an increase in BER performance without an increase in E E
b b
. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
End of Chapter 4
End of Chapter 4
Receiver Design
Receiver Design
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
Binary Amplitude Shift Keying Binary Amplitude Shift Keying
Pages 212 Pages 212- -219 219
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The analytical signal for binary amplitude shift keying The analytical signal for binary amplitude shift keying
(BASK) is: (BASK) is:
s s
BASK BASK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) sin (2 ) sin (2 f f
C C
t) t) (S&M Eq. 5.1) (S&M Eq. 5.1)
The signal The signal s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) can be ) can be any two any two shapes over a bit time shapes over a bit time
T T
b b
but but it is usually a rectangular signal of amplitude 0 for a it is usually a rectangular signal of amplitude 0 for a
binary 0 and amplitude A for binary 1. Then BASK is also binary 0 and amplitude A for binary 1. Then BASK is also
known as known as on on- -off keying off keying (OOK). (OOK).
T T
b b
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
MS Figure 3.5 MS Figure 3.5
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The binary amplitude shift keying (BASK) signal can be The binary amplitude shift keying (BASK) signal can be
simulated in simulated in Simulink Simulink. .
s s
BASK BASK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) sin 2 ) sin 2 f f
C C
t (S&M Eq. 5.1) t (S&M Eq. 5.1)
baseband binary PAM signal 0, baseband binary PAM signal 0,1 V, 1 V, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
Sinusoidal carrier Sinusoidal carrier f f
C C
= 20 kHz, A = 20 kHz, A
c c
= 5 V = 5 V
Multiplier Multiplier
BASK signal BASK signal
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
A BASK signal is a baseband binary PAM signal multiplied A BASK signal is a baseband binary PAM signal multiplied
by a carrier (S&M Figure 5 by a carrier (S&M Figure 5- -3). 3).
Unmodulated sinusoidal carrier Unmodulated sinusoidal carrier
Baseband binary PAM signal Baseband binary PAM signal
BASK signal BASK signal
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The unipolar binary PAM signal can be decomposed into a The unipolar binary PAM signal can be decomposed into a
polar PAM signal and DC level (S&M Figure 5 polar PAM signal and DC level (S&M Figure 5- -4). 4).
Unipolar binary PAM signal Unipolar binary PAM signal
Polar binary PAM signal Polar binary PAM signal
DC level DC level
0 0 1 V 1 V
0.5 V 0.5 V
0.5 V 0.5 V
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The spectrum of the BASK signal is (S&M Eq. 5.2): The spectrum of the BASK signal is (S&M Eq. 5.2):
S S
BASK BASK
(f (f) = ) =
F
F( ( s s
ASK ASK
(t (t) ) ) ) = =
F
F( ( s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) sin (2 ) sin (2 f f
C C
t) ) t) )
S S
BASK BASK
(f (f) = 1/2 j ) = 1/2 j (S
baseband
(f f
C
) + S
baseband
(f + f
C
) )
The analytical signal for the baseband binary PAM signal is: The analytical signal for the baseband binary PAM signal is:
s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = ) = s s
PAM PAM
(t (t) + A/2 ) + A/2 (S&M Eq. 5.3) (S&M Eq. 5.3)
S S
baseband baseband
(f (f) = ) = S S
PAM PAM
(f (f) + A/2 ) + A/2 (f) (f) (S&M Eq. 5.4) (S&M Eq. 5.4)
Therefore by substitution (S&M Eq. 5.5): Therefore by substitution (S&M Eq. 5.5):
S S
BASK BASK
(f (f) = 1/ 2j ( ) = 1/ 2j ( S S
PAM PAM
(f (f f f
C C
) + A/2 ) + A/2 (f (f f f
C C
) )
S S
PAM PAM
(f (f + + f f
C C
) ) A/2 A/2 (f + (f + f f
C C
) ) ) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bi bi- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the BASK power spectral density PSD of the BASK
signal is (S&M Eq. 5.7): signal is (S&M Eq. 5.7):
G G
BASK BASK
(f (f) = 1/4 ) = 1/4 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f f f
C C
) + 1/4 ) + 1/4 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f + + f f
C C
) )
+ A + A
2 2
/16 /16 (f (f f f
C C
) + A ) + A
2 2
/16 /16 (f + (f + f f
C C
) )
For a rectangular polar PAM signal ( For a rectangular polar PAM signal ( A): A):
G G
PAM PAM
(f (f) = (A/2) ) = (A/2)
2 2
/ r / r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / f / r r
b b
) ) (S&M Eq. 5.8) (S&M Eq. 5.8)
MS Figure 3.7 MS Figure 3.7
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the BASK power spectral density PSD of the BASK
signal is: signal is:
G G
PAM PAM
(f (f) = (A/2) ) = (A/2)
2 2
/ r / r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / r f / r
b b
) )
G G
BASK BASK
(f (f) = 1/2 ) = 1/2 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f + + f f
C C
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 (f + (f + f f
C C
) )
Carrier 20 kHz Carrier 20 kHz
sinc sinc
2 2
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 3.7 MS Figure 3.7
1 kHz 1 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a BASK signal as a percentage of total of a BASK signal as a percentage of total
power is power is double double that for the same bit rate that for the same bit rate r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b
binary binary
rectangular PAM (MS Table 2.1 p. 22) rectangular PAM (MS Table 2.1 p. 22)
(MS Table 3.1 p. 91). (MS Table 3.1 p. 91).
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2/ 2/T T
b b
90% 90%
3/ 3/T T
b b
93% 93%
4/ 4/T T
b b
95% 95%
6/ 6/T T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
8/ 8/T T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
10/ 10/T T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
Binary Phase Shift Keying Binary Phase Shift Keying
Pages 219 Pages 219- -225 225
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The analytical signal for binary phase shift keying The analytical signal for binary phase shift keying
(BPSK) is: (BPSK) is:
s s
BPSK BPSK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband baseband
sin (2 sin (2 f f
C C
t + t + ) (S&M Eq. 5.11) ) (S&M Eq. 5.11)
s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = + A b ) = + A b
i i
= 1 = 1 s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = ) = A b A b
i i
= 0 = 0
0 0 +180 +180 +180 +180
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
MS Figure 3.13 MS Figure 3.13
T T
b b
0 0
0 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BPSK signal initial phase The BPSK signal initial phase = 0 = 0 , +A is a phase shift = , +A is a phase shift =
0 0 and and A is a phase shift = +180 A is a phase shift = +180
s s
BPSK BPSK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband baseband
sin (2 sin (2 f f
C C
t) (S&M Eq. 5.11) t) (S&M Eq. 5.11)
s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = + A b ) = + A b
i i
= 1 = 1 s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = ) = A b A b
i i
= 0 = 0
0 0 +180 +180 +180 +180
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
MS Figure 3.13 MS Figure 3.13
T T
b b
0 0
0 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The binary phase shift keying (BPSK) signal can be The binary phase shift keying (BPSK) signal can be
simulated in simulated in Simulink Simulink. .
baseband binary PAM signal baseband binary PAM signal 0,1 V, 0,1 V, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
PM modulator PM modulator
BPSK BPSK
signal signal
Fig312.mdl Fig312.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Phase Modulator The Phase Modulator
block is in the block is in the
Modulation, Modulation,
Communication Communication
Blockset Blockset but as an but as an
analog analog passband passband
modulator modulator not not a digital a digital
baseband baseband modulator. modulator.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Phase Modulator block has the parameters of a The Phase Modulator block has the parameters of a
carrier frequency carrier frequency f f
C C
in Hz, in Hz, initial phase initial phase in radians and the in radians and the
phase deviation constant phase deviation constant in radians per volt ( in radians per volt (rad rad / V). / V).
f f
C C
= 20 kHz = 20 kHz
initial phase initial phase
o o
= =
phase deviation phase deviation k k
p p
= = / V / V
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Random Integer Generator outputs 0,1 V and with a The Random Integer Generator outputs 0,1 V and with a
initial phase = initial phase = and a and a phase deviation constant = phase deviation constant = /V, /V,
the phase output the phase output of the BPSK signal is: of the BPSK signal is:
b b
i i
= 0 = 0 = = + 0( + 0( /V) = /V) =
b b
i i
= 1 = 1 = = + 1( + 1( /V) = 2 /V) = 2 = 0 = 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The spectrum of the BPSK signal is (S&M Eq. 5.13): The spectrum of the BPSK signal is (S&M Eq. 5.13):
S S
BPSK BPSK
(f (f) = ) =
F
F( ( s s
PSK PSK
(t (t) ) ) ) = =
F
F(s (s
baseband baseband
(t (t) sin 2 ) sin 2 f f
C C
t) t)
S S
BPSK BPSK
(f (f) = 1/2 j ) = 1/2 j (S
baseband
(f f
c
) + S
baseband
(f + f
C
) )
The analytical signal for the baseband binary PAM signal is: The analytical signal for the baseband binary PAM signal is:
s s
baseband baseband
(t (t) = ) = s s
PAM PAM
(t (t) ) (S&M Eq. 5.12) (S&M Eq. 5.12)
S S
baseband baseband
(f (f) = ) = S S
PAM PAM
(f (f) )
Note that there is Note that there is no DC level no DC level in in s s
PAM PAM
(t (t) and therefore by ) and therefore by
substitution: substitution:
S S
BPSK BPSK
(f (f) = 1/ 2j ( ) = 1/ 2j ( S S
PAM PAM
(f (f f f
C C
) ) S S
PAM PAM
(f (f + + f f
C C
) ) ) )
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bi bi- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the BPSK power spectral density PSD of the BPSK
signal is (S&M Eq. 5.13) signal is (S&M Eq. 5.13)
G G
BPSK BPSK
(f) = 1/4 (f) = 1/4 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f f f
C C
) + 1/4 ) + 1/4 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f + + f f
C C
) )
For a rectangular polar PAM signal ( For a rectangular polar PAM signal ( A): A):
G G
PAM PAM
(f (f) = A ) = A
2 2
/ / r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / f / r r
b b
) (S&M Eq. 5.8 modified) ) (S&M Eq. 5.8 modified)
MS Figure 3.14 MS Figure 3.14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the BPSK power spectral density PSD of the BPSK
signal is: signal is:
G G
BPSK BPSK
(f) = 1/2 (f) = 1/2 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f + f + f
C C
) )
G G
PAM PAM
(f (f) = A ) = A
2 2
/ r / r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / r f / r
b b
) )
No carrier No carrier
sinc sinc
2 2
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 3.14 MS Figure 3.14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a BPSK signal as a percentage of total of a BPSK signal as a percentage of total
power is power is double double that for the same bit rate that for the same bit rate r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b
binary binary
rectangular PAM (MS Table 2.1 p. 22) and the same as rectangular PAM (MS Table 2.1 p. 22) and the same as
BASK (MS Table 3.1 p. 91) BASK (MS Table 3.1 p. 91)
(MS Tabl (MS Table 3.5 p. 100) e 3.5 p. 100)
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2/ 2/T T
b b
90% 90%
3/ 3/T T
b b
93% 93%
4/ 4/T T
b b
95% 95%
6/ 6/T T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
8/ 8/T T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
10/ 10/T T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
Binary Frequency Shift Keying Binary Frequency Shift Keying
Pages 219 Pages 219- -225 225
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The analytical signal for binary frequency shift keying The analytical signal for binary frequency shift keying
(BFSK) is: (BFSK) is:
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = ) = A sin (2 A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i
= 1 = 1
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = A sin (2 ) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i
= 0 = 0
f f
c c
+ + f f f f
c c
f f f f
c c
f f
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
T T
b b
f f
c c
+ + f f
f f
c c
f f
MS Figure 3.9 MS Figure 3.9
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BFSK signal initial phase The BFSK signal initial phase = 0 = 0
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = ) = A sin (2 A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t) if b ) t) if b
i i
= 1 = 1
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = A sin (2 ) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t) if b ) t) if b
i i
= 0 = 0
f f
c c
+ + f f f f
c c
f f f f
c c
f f
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
T T
b b
f f
c c
+ + f f
f f
c c
f f
MS Figure 3.9 MS Figure 3.9
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The binary frequency shift keying (BFSK) signal can be The binary frequency shift keying (BFSK) signal can be
simulated in simulated in Simulink Simulink. .
baseband binary PAM signal baseband binary PAM signal 0,1 V, 0,1 V, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
FM Modulator FM Modulator
BFSK BFSK
signal signal
Fig38.mdl Fig38.mdl
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Frequency Modulator The Frequency Modulator
block is in the block is in the
Modulation, Modulation,
Communication Communication
Blockset Blockset but as an but as an
analog analog passband passband
modulator modulator not not a digital a digital
baseband baseband modulator. modulator.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Frequency Modulator block has the parameters of a The Frequency Modulator block has the parameters of a
carrier frequency carrier frequency f f
C C
in Hz, in Hz, initial phase initial phase in radians and the in radians and the
frequency deviation constant frequency deviation constant in Hertz per volt (Hz/V). in Hertz per volt (Hz/V).
f f
C C
= 20 kHz = 20 kHz
initial phase = initial phase = 0 0
frequency deviation = frequency deviation =
2000 2000
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Random Integer Generator outputs 0,1 V but is offset The Random Integer Generator outputs 0,1 V but is offset
to to 1 1 and with a initial phase = and with a initial phase = 0 and a 0 and a frequency frequency
deviation constant = deviation constant = 2000 2000 Hz/V, the frequency shift Hz/V, the frequency shift f f of of
the BFSK signal is: the BFSK signal is:
b b
i i
= 0 d = 0 d
i i
= = 1 1 f f = = 0 0 1(2000 Hz/V) = 1(2000 Hz/V) = 2000 Hz 2000 Hz
b b
i i
= 1 d = 1 d
i i
= +1 = +1 f f = 0 + 1(2000 Hz/V) = +2000 Hz = 0 + 1(2000 Hz/V) = +2000 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BFSK signal can be The BFSK signal can be decomposed decomposed as (S&M Eq. 5.14): as (S&M Eq. 5.14):
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband1 baseband1
(t) sin (2 (t) sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t + ) t + ) + ) +
s s
baseband2 baseband2
(t) sin (2 (t) sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t + ) t + ) )
f f
c c
f f f f
c c
+ + f f f f
c c
f f f f
c c
+ + f f f f
c c
+ + f f
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BFSK signal is the The BFSK signal is the sum sum of two BASK signals: of two BASK signals:
s s
BFSK BFSK
(t (t) = ) = s s
baseband1 baseband1
(t) sin (2 (t) sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t + ) t + ) + ) +
s s
baseband2 baseband2
(t) sin (2 (t) sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t + ) t + ) )
From the From the linearity property linearity property, the resulting , the resulting single single- -sided sided PSD PSD
of the BFSK signal of the BFSK signal G G
BFSK BFSK
(f (f) is the ) is the sum sum of two of two G G
BASK BASK
(f (f) )
PSDs with f = PSDs with f = f f
C C
f f: :
G G
BFSK BFSK
(f (f) = (A/2) ) = (A/2)
2 2
/ 2 / 2 r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / f / r r
b b
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 (f) (f)
f f
c c
+ + f f f f
c c
f f
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the BFSK power spectral density PSD of the BFSK
signal is: signal is:
G G
BFSK BFSK
(f (f) = (A/2) ) = (A/2)
2 2
/ 2 / 2r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) ) / / r r
b b
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) )
+ (A/2) + (A/2)
2 2
/ 2 / 2r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( ( (f f
C C
f f)/ / r r
b b
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 ( (f f
C C
f f) )
carriers carriers
sinc sinc
2 2
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 3.10 MS Figure 3.10
f f = 2 kHz = 2 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Minimum frequency shift keying (MFSK) for BFSK occurs Minimum frequency shift keying (MFSK) for BFSK occurs
when when f f = 1/2T
b
= r
b
/2 Hz.
G G
BFSK BFSK
(f (f) = (A/2) ) = (A/2)
2 2
/ 2 / 2r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) ) / / r r
b b
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) )
+ (A/2) + (A/2)
2 2
/ 2 / 2r r
b b
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( ( (f f
C C
f f)/ / r r
b b
) + A ) + A
2 2
/8 /8 ( (f f
C C
f f) )
carriers carriers
sinc sinc
2 2
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 3.11 MS Figure 3.11
f f = 500 Hz = 500 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
This BFSK This BFSK carrier frequency separation carrier frequency separation 2 2 f f = 1/ = 1/T T
b b
= = r r
b b
Hz is Hz is
the the minimum possible minimum possible because each carrier spectral impulse because each carrier spectral impulse
is at the is at the null null of the PSD of the other decomposed BASK of the PSD of the other decomposed BASK
signal and thus is called signal and thus is called minimum frequency shift keying minimum frequency shift keying
(MFSK). (MFSK).
MS Figure 3.11 MS Figure 3.11
2 2 f f = 1000 Hz = 1000 Hz
sinc sinc
2 2
carriers carriers
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a BFSK signal as a percentage of total of a BFSK signal as a percentage of total
power is power is greater greater than that of either BASK or BPSK by 2 than that of either BASK or BPSK by 2 f f
Hz for the same bit rate Hz for the same bit rate r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b
(MS Table 3.3 p. 95). (MS Table 3.3 p. 95).
For MFSK 2 For MFSK 2 f f = r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b
Hz. Hz.
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2 2 f f + + 2/ 2/T T
b b
90% 90%
2 2 f f + + 3/ 3/T T
b b
93% 93%
2 2 f f + + 4/ 4/T T
b b
95% 95%
2 2 f f + + 6/ 6/T T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
2 2 f f + + 8/ 8/T T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
2 2 f f + + 10/ 10/T T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
Coherent Demodulation of Coherent Demodulation of
Bandpass Signals Bandpass Signals
Pages 225 Pages 225- -236 236
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The development of the optimum receiver for The development of the optimum receiver for bandpass bandpass
signals signals utilizes the utilizes the same concepts same concepts as that for the optimum as that for the optimum
baseband receiver baseband receiver: :
Optimum Filter Optimum Filter
o b
h (t) = k s(iT t)
Correlation Receiver Correlation Receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The optimum filter The optimum filter H H
o o
(f (f) and the correlation receiver ) and the correlation receiver
are equivalent here also, with s are equivalent here also, with s
1 1
(t) = (t) = s(t s(t) for ) for symmetrical symmetrical
signals signals and and r(t r(t) = ) = s(t s(t) + ) + n(t n(t) where ) where is the communication is the communication
channel attenuation and channel attenuation and n(t n(t) is AWGN. The energy per bit ) is AWGN. The energy per bit
E E
b b
and the probability of bit error and the probability of bit error P P
b b
is (S&M p. 226): is (S&M p. 226):

b b
b b
iT iT
2 2
(i-1)T (i-1)T
= s(t) s(t) dt = s (t) dt
b
E
| |
|
|
\ .
2
= Q
b
b
o
E
P
N
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The matched filter or correlation receiver is a The matched filter or correlation receiver is a coherent coherent
demodulation demodulation process for bandpass signals because not process for bandpass signals because not
only is bit time ( only is bit time (T T
b b
) as for baseband signals required but ) as for baseband signals required but
carrier carrier synchronization synchronization is also needed. Carrier is also needed. Carrier
synchronization requires an estimate of the synchronization requires an estimate of the transmitted transmitted
frequency frequency ( (f f
C C
) and the ) and the arrival phase arrival phase at the receiver ( at the receiver ( ): ):
1
s (t) = sin(2 t + )
C
f
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BPSK signals are symmetrical with: BPSK signals are symmetrical with:
s s
1T 1T
(t) = (t) = s s
2T 2T
(t) = A sin(2 (t) = A sin(2 f f
c c
t) S&M t) S&M Eqs Eqs. 5.15 . 5.15- -5.19 5.19
| |
| |

i
2
(i-1)
i
2 2 2 2
(i-1)
= A sin (2 t) dt
A A
= 1 cos (4 t) dt =
2 2
b
b
b
b
T
b, BPSK C
T
T
b
b, BPSK C
T
E f
T
E f
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2 A
= Q = Q
b b
b, BPSK
o o
E T
P
N N
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
For this analysis of For this analysis of E E
b, PSK b, PSK
for BPSK signals it is assumed for BPSK signals it is assumed
that the transmitter produces an that the transmitter produces an integer number integer number of cycles of cycles
within one bit period within one bit period T T
b b
: :
| |

i
2 2
(i-1)
i
2 2 2 2
(i-1)
A
= 1 cos (4 t) dt
2
A A
= cos (4 t) dt
2 2
b
b
b
b
T
b, BPSK C
T
T
b
b, BPSK C
T
E f
T
E f
0 0
S&M Eq. 5.17 S&M Eq. 5.17
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
However, even for a non However, even for a non- -integer number of cycles within integer number of cycles within
one bit period one bit period T T
b b
if 1 / if 1 / f f
C C
= = T T
C C
<< << T T
b b
: :

i
(i-1)
i
2 2 2 2
(i-1)
cos (4 t) dt <<
A A
= cos (4 t) dt
2 2
b
b
b
b
T
C b
T
T
b
b, BPSK C
T
f T
T
E f
insignificant insignificant
S&M Eq. 5.17 S&M Eq. 5.17
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BPSK signals are symmetrical with: BPSK signals are symmetrical with:
s s
1T 1T
(t) = (t) = s s
2T 2T
(t) = A sin(2 (t) = A sin(2 f f
c c
t) S&M t) S&M Eqs Eqs. 5.15 . 5.15- -5.19 5.19
and s and s
1 1
(t) = sin (2 (t) = sin (2 f f
c c
t) t)

i
i i 1
(i-1)
a (i ) = s (t) s (t) dt
b
b
T
b
T
T

=
2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i )
= 0
2
b b
T T
S&M Eq. 4.67 S&M Eq. 4.67
S&M Eq. 4.71 S&M Eq. 4.71
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BPSK signals are symmetrical with: BPSK signals are symmetrical with:
s s
1T 1T
(t) = (t) = s s
2T 2T
(t) = A sin(2 (t) = A sin(2 f f
c c
t) S&M t) S&M Eqs Eqs. 5.15 . 5.15- -5.19 5.19
=
opt
0
S&M Figure 4 S&M Figure 4- -16 16
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
For this analysis of For this analysis of E E
d, ASK d, ASK
for BASK signals it is assumed for BASK signals it is assumed
that the transmitter produces an that the transmitter produces an integer number integer number of cycles of cycles
within one bit period: within one bit period:
| |

i
2 2
(i-1)
i
2 2 2 2
(i-1)
A
= 1 cos (4 t) dt
2
A A
= cos (4 t) dt
2 2
b
b
b
b
T
d, BASK C
T
T
b
d, BASK C
T
E f
T
E f
0 0
S&M Eq. 5.27 S&M Eq. 5.27
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BASK OOK signals are BASK OOK signals are not not symmetrical with: symmetrical with:
s s
1T 1T
(t) = A sin(2 (t) = A sin(2 f f
c c
t t) ) s s
2T 2T
(t) = 0 (t) = 0 S&M S&M Eqs Eqs. 5.22, 5.23 . 5.22, 5.23
and s and s
1 1
(t) = sin(2 (t) = sin(2 f f
c c
t t) s ) s
2 2
(t) = 0 (t) = 0
| |

i
i i 1 2
(i-1)
i
2
1 1 2
(i-1)
a (i ) = s (t) s (t) s (t) dt
A
a (i ) = A s (t) dt = a (i ) = 0
2
b
b
b
b
T
b
T
T
b
b b
T
T
T
T T
S&M Eq. 5.24 S&M Eq. 5.24- -5.26 5.26

2 1
opt
a (i ) +a (i ) A
= =
2 4
b b b
T T T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BASK signals BASK signals in general in general may may not not be symmetrical with: be symmetrical with:
s s
1T 1T
(t) = A (t) = A
1 1
sin(2 sin(2 f f
c c
t) s t) s
2T 2T
(t) = A (t) = A
2 2
sin(2 sin(2 f f
c c
t) t)
and s and s
1 1
(t) (t) s s
2 2
(t) = sin (2 (t) = sin (2 f f
c c
t) where the amplitude is arbitrary. t) where the amplitude is arbitrary.
( )
= =
1 2
2 1
opt
A +A
a (i ) +a (i )

2 4
b
b b
T
T T
| |

i
i i 1 2
(i-1)
i
2
i
i i 1
(i-1)
a (i ) = s (t) s (t) s (t) dt
A
a (i ) = A s (t) dt =
2
b
b
b
b
T
b
T
T
b
b
T
T
T
T
S&M Eq. 4.67 S&M Eq. 4.67
S&M Eq. 4.71 S&M Eq. 4.71
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BFSK signals are BFSK signals are not not symmetrical with: symmetrical with:
s s
T T
(t (t) = A sin(2 ) = A sin(2 ( (f f
c c
f f) ) t) S&M Eq. 5.30 t) S&M Eq. 5.30
| |
if and

b
b
iT
2
(i-1)T
2 2
b 1 2
= A (sin (2 + ) t sin (2 ) t )) dt
= A T + = n / = n /
d, BFSK C C
d, BFSK C b C b
E f f f f
E f f T f f T
| |
| |
= |
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q Q
2 2
d, FSK
b
b, BFSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
S&M Eq. 5.31 S&M Eq. 5.31
S&M Eq. 5.32 S&M Eq. 5.32
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
For this analysis of For this analysis of E E
d, FSK d, FSK
for BFSK signals it is assumed for BFSK signals it is assumed
that the transmitter produces an that the transmitter produces an integer number integer number of cycles of cycles
within one bit period: within one bit period:


+

i
2 2
2 2
(i-1)
i
2 2
(i-1)
i
2 2
(i-1)
A
= A cos (4 ( + ) t) dt
2
A
cos (4 ( ) t) dt
2
A sin (2 ( ) t) sin (2 ( ) t) dt
b
b
b
b
b
b
T
d, BFSK b C
T
T
C
T
T
C C
T
E T f f
f f
f f f f
0 0
S&M Eq. 5.31 S&M Eq. 5.31
0 0
0 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BFSK signals are BFSK signals are not not symmetrical with: symmetrical with:
s s
T T
(t (t) = A sin(2 ) = A sin(2 ( (f f
c c
f f) ) t) S&M Eq. 5.30 t) S&M Eq. 5.30
and s and s
1 1
(t) (t) s s
2 2
(t) = sin(2 (t) = sin(2 ( (f f
c c
+ + f f) t) ) t) sin(2 sin(2 ( (f f
c c
f f) t) ) t)
S&M Eq. 5.31 S&M Eq. 5.31
S&M Eq. 5.33 S&M Eq. 5.33
| |

i
i i 1 2
(i-1)
i
2
i
i i i
(i-1)
a (i ) = s (t) s (t) s (t) dt
A
a (i ) = A s (t) dt =
2
b
b
b
b
T
b
T
T
b
b
T
T
T
T
( )
if

1 2
2 1
opt
1 2
A A
a (i ) +a (i )
= = = 0
2 4
A = A
b
b b
T
T T
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
A comparison of coherent BPSK, BFSK and BASK A comparison of coherent BPSK, BFSK and BASK
illustrates the functional differences, but BFSK and BASK illustrates the functional differences, but BFSK and BASK
uses uses E E
d d
and not and not E E
b b
: :
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2 A
= Q = Q
b b
b, BPSK
o o
E T
P
N N
2 2
A
=
2
b
b, BPSK
T
E
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q = Q
2 2
d, FSK
b
b, BFSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
2 2
= A
d, BFSK b
E T
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q =Q
2 4
d, ASK
b
b, BASK
o o
E
T
P
N N
2 2
A
=
2
b
d, BASK
T
E
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The normalized The normalized E E
b, FSK b, FSK
= = E E
b, PSK b, PSK
= =
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
b b
/ 2 / 2 (S&M Eq. (S&M Eq.
5.24) and 5.24) and E E
b, ASK b, ASK
= =
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
b b
/ 4 / 4 (S&M Eq. 5.36) so that: (S&M Eq. 5.36) so that:
Thus there are Thus there are no practical advantages no practical advantages for either coherent for either coherent
BFSK or BASK and BPSK is preferred (S&M p. 236). BFSK or BASK and BPSK is preferred (S&M p. 236).
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2
A
= Q = Q
b, PSK
b
b, BPSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
2 2
A
=
2
b
b, BPSK
T
E
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q = Q
2
b, FSK
b
b, BFSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
2 2
A
=
2
b
b, BFSK
T
E
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
A
= Q = Q
4
b, ASK
b
b, BASK
o o
E
T
P
N N
2 2
A
=
4
b
b, BASK
T
E
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
For the same For the same P P
b b
BPSK uses the least amount of energy, BPSK uses the least amount of energy,
BFSK requires twice as much and BASK four times as much BFSK requires twice as much and BASK four times as much
energy: energy:
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2
A
= Q = Q
b, PSK
b
b, BPSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q = Q
2
b, FSK
b
b, BFSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2

A
= Q = Q
4
b, ASK
b
b, BASK
o o
E
T
P
N N
Argument of Argument of
Q should be Q should be
as as large large as as
possible to possible to
minimize minimize P P
b b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Optimum Bandpass Receiver: Optimum Bandpass Receiver:
The Correlation Receiver The Correlation Receiver
Pages 81 Pages 81- -85 85
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The matched filter or The matched filter or
correlation receiver correlation receiver
for for bandpass bandpass
symmetrical symmetrical
signals signals can be can be
simulated in simulated in
Simulink: Simulink:
MS Figure 3.1 MS Figure 3.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The matched filter or The matched filter or
correlation receiver correlation receiver
for for bandpass bandpass
asymmetrical asymmetrical
signals signals can also can also
be simulated be simulated
in in Simulink: Simulink:
MS Figure 3.2 MS Figure 3.2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The alternate alternate but but
universal universal structure structure
which can be used which can be used
for both asymmetric for both asymmetric
or symmetric binary or symmetric binary
bandpass signals can bandpass signals can
be simulated in be simulated in
Simulink: Simulink:
MS Figure 3.3 MS Figure 3.3
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Binary Amplitude Shift Keying Binary Amplitude Shift Keying
Pages 86 Pages 86- -92 92
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Binary ASK (OOK) coherent digital communication system Binary ASK (OOK) coherent digital communication system
with BER analysis: with BER analysis:
MS Figure 3.4 MS Figure 3.4
Threshold Threshold
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The BER and The BER and P P
b b
comparison (MS Table 3.2, p. 91): comparison (MS Table 3.2, p. 91):
Table 3.2 Table 3.2 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
d d
/ N / N
o o
in a Binary ASK Digital in a Binary ASK Digital
Communication System with Optimum Receiver Communication System with Optimum Receiver
E E
d d
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 2.9 2.9 10 10
- -3 3
2.53 2.53 10 10
- -3 3
10 10 1.12 1.12 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
8 8 3.46 3.46 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
6 6 7.65 7.65 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 1.335 1.335 10 10
- -1 1
1.318 1.318 10 10
- -1 1
2 2 1.863 1.863 10 10
- -1 1
1.872 1.872 10 10
- -1 1
0 0 2.387 2.387 10 10
- -1 1
2.394 2.394 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Binary Phase Shift Keying Binary Phase Shift Keying
Pages 98 Pages 98- -103 103
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Binary PSK coherent digital communication system with Binary PSK coherent digital communication system with
BER analysis: BER analysis:
MS Figure 3.12 MS Figure 3.12
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 4
The BER and The BER and P P
b b
comparison (SVU Table 3.5, p. 167): comparison (SVU Table 3.5, p. 167):
Table 3.5 Table 3.5 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a Binary PSK Digital in a Binary PSK Digital
Communication System with Optimum Receiver Communication System with Optimum Receiver
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
10 10 0 0 4.05 4.05 10 10
- -6 6
8 8 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
2.06 2.06 10 10
- -4 4
6 6 2.5 2.5 10 10
- -4 4
2.41 2.41 10 10
- -3 3
4 4 1.31 1.31 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 3.35 3.35 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 8.19 8.19 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Binary Frequency Shift Keying Binary Frequency Shift Keying
Pages 92 Pages 92- -98 98
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Binary FSK coherent digital communication system with Binary FSK coherent digital communication system with
BER analysis: BER analysis:
MS Figure 3.9 MS Figure 3.9
f f
C C
+ + f f
f f
C C
f f
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BER and P The BER and P
b b
comparison (MS Table 3.4, p. 98): comparison (MS Table 3.4, p. 98):
Table 3.4 Table 3.4 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
d d
/ N / N
o o
in a Binary FSK (MFSK) Digital in a Binary FSK (MFSK) Digital
Communication System with Optimum Receiver Communication System with Optimum Receiver
E E
d d
/ /N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 2.5 2.5 10 10
- -3 3
2.5 2.5 10 10
- -3 3
10 10 1.29 1.29 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
8 8 3.50 3.50 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
6 6 8.04 8.04 10 10
- -2 2
7.93 7.93 10 10
- -2 2
4 4 1.352 1.352 10 10
- -1 1
1.314 1.314 10 10
- -1 1
2 2 1.833 1.833 10 10
- -1 1
1.872 1.872 10 10
- -1 1
0 0 2.456 2.456 10 10
- -1 1
2.393 2.393 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BER and P The BER and P
b b
performance comparison for BASK, performance comparison for BASK,
BPSK and BFSK (MFSK): BPSK and BFSK (MFSK):
E E
d d
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 1.12 1.12 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
BASK BASK
8 8 3.46 3.46 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 0 0 4.05 4.05 10 10
- -6 6
BPSK BPSK
8 8 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
2.06 2.06 10 10
- -4 4
E E
d d
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 1.29 1.29 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
BFSK BFSK
8 8 3.50 3.50 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BER and P BER and P
b b
comparison using comparison using E E
b b
with with E E
b b
, ,
ASK ASK
= =
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
b b
2 2
/ 4 / 4
and thus reduced by 10 log (0.5) and thus reduced by 10 log (0.5) 3 dB or 3 dB or: :
BASK performs better than BFSK but BPSK is the best. BASK performs better than BFSK but BPSK is the best.
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
7 7 1.12 1.12 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
BASK BASK
5 5 3.46 3.46 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 0 0 4.05 4.05 10 10
- -6 6
BPSK BPSK
8 8 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
2.06 2.06 10 10
- -4 4
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 1.29 1.29 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
BFSK BFSK
8 8 3.50 3.50 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
Differential (Noncoherent) Phase Differential (Noncoherent) Phase
Shift Keying Shift Keying
Pages 267 Pages 267- -271 271
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Differential (noncoherent) phase shift keying (DPSK) is Differential (noncoherent) phase shift keying (DPSK) is
demodulated by using the received signal to derive the demodulated by using the received signal to derive the
reference signal. The DPSK reference signal. The DPSK protocol protocol is: is:
Binary 1 Binary 1: Transmit the carrier signal with the : Transmit the carrier signal with the same phase same phase
as used for the previous bit. as used for the previous bit.
Binary 0 Binary 0: Transmit the carrier signal with its : Transmit the carrier signal with its phase shifted phase shifted
by 180 by 180 relative to the previous bit. relative to the previous bit.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The one The one- -bit delayed reference signal r bit delayed reference signal r
i i- -1 1
(t) is derived from (t) is derived from
the received signal the received signal r r
i i
(t (t) and if the carrier frequency ) and if the carrier frequency f f
C C
is an is an
integral multiple of the bit rate integral multiple of the bit rate r r
b b
: :
The output of the integrator for a binary 0 and binary 1 The output of the integrator for a binary 0 and binary 1
then is then is z(i z(iT T
b b
) = ) =
2 2
A A
2 2
T T
b b
/ 2 (S&M / 2 (S&M Eqs Eqs. 5.91 and 5.93) . 5.91 and 5.93)

i 1
i 1
r (t) = A sin (2 (t ) + )
r (t) = A sin (2 t + )
C b
C
f T
f
S&M S&M Eqs Eqs. .
5.88 and 5.89 5.88 and 5.89
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
DPSK signals have an equivalent bit interval DPSK signals have an equivalent bit interval T T
DPSK DPSK
= 2 = 2 T T
b b
. .
The probability of bit error for DPSK signal is different than The probability of bit error for DPSK signal is different than
that for coherent demodulation of symmetric or asymmetric that for coherent demodulation of symmetric or asymmetric
signals and is: signals and is:
| | | |

| |
\ . \ .
2 2
1 1
= exp = exp
2 2 2
A
=
2
b, DPSK
DPSK
b, DPSK
o o
b
b, DPSK
E
E
P
N N
T
E
S&M Eq. 5.102 S&M Eq. 5.102
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Differential Phase Shift Keying Differential Phase Shift Keying
Pages 130 Pages 130- -135 135
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Binary DPSK Binary DPSK noncoherent noncoherent digital communication system digital communication system
with BER analysis: with BER analysis:
MS Figure 3.33 MS Figure 3.33
one one- -bit bit
continuous continuous
delay delay
BPF BPF
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Binary DPSK Binary DPSK noncoherent noncoherent digital communication system digital communication system
differential binary encoder differential binary encoder Simulink Subsystem Simulink Subsystem: :
MS Figure 3.34 MS Figure 3.34
XOR XOR
one bit one bit
sample delay sample delay
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Simulink Logic and Simulink Logic and
Bit Operations Bit Operations
provides the provides the
Logical Operator Logical Operator
block: block:
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Simulink Logical Operator Simulink Logical Operator blocks can be selected to blocks can be selected to
provide multiple input AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR, provide multiple input AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR,
NXOR, and NOT functions: NXOR, and NOT functions:
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The Logic and Bit Operations Logic and Bit Operations
can be configured as can be configured as scalar scalar
Boolean binary (0, 1) Boolean binary (0, 1) or or
M M- -ary (0, 1 ary (0, 1 M M 1) 1) vector vector
logic functions. Here scalar logic functions. Here scalar
Boolean binary data is used. Boolean binary data is used.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The XOR logic generates the DPSK The XOR logic generates the DPSK source coding source coding: :
Table 3.16 Table 3.16 Input Binary Data Input Binary Data b b
i i
, Differentially Encoded , Differentially Encoded
Binary Data Binary Data d d
i i
, and Transmitted Phase , and Transmitted Phase
i i
(Radians) for a (Radians) for a
DPSK Signal. DPSK Signal.
b b
i i
d d
i i- -1 1
d d
i i

i i
one one- -bit startup bit startup
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 XOR logic XOR logic
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The Signal Processing Signal Processing
Blockset Blockset provides the provides the
Filtering Filtering, , Analog Filter Analog Filter
Design Design block: block:
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The Signal Processing Signal Processing Blockset Blockset provides the analog provides the analog
bandpass filter (BPF) specified as a 9 bandpass filter (BPF) specified as a 9- -pole Butterworth pole Butterworth
filter with cutoff frequencies of 19 kHz and 21 kHz filter with cutoff frequencies of 19 kHz and 21 kHz centered centered
around the carrier frequency around the carrier frequency f f
C C
= 20 kHz. = 20 kHz.
rad/s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The Butterworth BPF is used for the The Butterworth BPF is used for the noncoherent receiver noncoherent receiver. .
The The coherent receiver coherent receiver uses the uses the integrator integrator as a as a virtual virtual
BPF BPF: :
MS Figure 3.12 MS Figure 3.12
PSK PSK
MS Figure 3.33 MS Figure 3.33
DPSK DPSK
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BER and The BER and P P
b b
comparison (MS Table 3.17, p. 134): comparison (MS Table 3.17, p. 134):
Table 3.17 Table 3.17 Observed BER and Theoretical Observed BER and Theoretical P P
b b
as a as a
Function of Function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a Binary DPSK Digital in a Binary DPSK Digital
Communication System with Noncoherent Correlation Communication System with Noncoherent Correlation
Receiver Receiver
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 0 0 6.6 6.6 10 10
- -8 8
10 10 2 2 10 10
- -4 4
2.3 2.3 10 10
- -5 5
8 8 5.1 5.1 10 10
- -3 3
1.8 1.8 10 10
- -3 3
6 6 2.61 2.61 10 10
- -2 2
9.3 9.3 10 10
- -3 3
4 4 7.91 7.91 10 10
- -2 2
4.06 4.06 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 1.559 1.559 10 10
- -2 2
1.025 1.025 10 10
- -1 1
0 0 2.393 2.393 10 10
- -1 1
1.839 1.839 10 10
- -1 1
Statistical variation Statistical variation
due to small sample due to small sample
size size
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BER and BER and P P
b b
comparison between noncoherent, source comparison between noncoherent, source
coded DPSK and coherent BPSK: coded DPSK and coherent BPSK:
BPSK performs better than DPSK but requires a coherent BPSK performs better than DPSK but requires a coherent
reference signal. DPSK performs nearly as well as BPSK reference signal. DPSK performs nearly as well as BPSK
at high SNR. at high SNR.
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
12 12 0 0 6.6 6.6 10 10
- -8 8
DPSK DPSK
10 10 2 2 10 10
- -4 4
2.3 2.3 10 10
- -5 5
8 8 5.1 5.1 10 10
- -3 3
1.8 1.8 10 10
- -3 3
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
10 10 0 0 4.05 4.05 10 10
- -6 6
BPSK BPSK
8 8 2 2 10 10
- -4 4
2.06 2.06 10 10
- -4 4
6 6 2.5 2.5 10 10
- -3 3
2.41 2.41 10 10
- -3 3
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
M M- -ary Bandpass Techniques: ary Bandpass Techniques:
Quaternary Phase Shift Keying Quaternary Phase Shift Keying
Pages 274 Pages 274- -286 286
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Quaternary phase shift keying (M Quaternary phase shift keying (M- -ary, M = 2 ary, M = 2
n n
= 4 or QPSK) = 4 or QPSK)
source codes source codes dibits dibits b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
as a as a symbol symbol with one possible with one possible
protocol protocol as: as:
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 11 A sin(2 11 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 45 t + 45 ) )
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 10 A sin(2 10 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 135 t + 135 ) )
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 00 A sin(2 00 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 225 t + 225 ) )
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 01 A sin(2 01 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 315 t + 315 ) )
The The Gray code Gray code is used as is used as
for M for M- -ary PAM to improve ary PAM to improve
the BER performance by the BER performance by
mitigating adjacent symbol mitigating adjacent symbol
error. The symbols are best error. The symbols are best
displayed as a constellation plot displayed as a constellation plot
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -36 36 modified modified

+
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Quaternary phase shift Quaternary phase shift
keying (QPSK) displayed keying (QPSK) displayed
as a as a constellation plot constellation plot
Note the signs on the Note the signs on the
sine reference axes. sine reference axes.
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -36 36 modified modified

+
cos cos
sin sin
constellation points constellation points
Constellation Constellation
Gemini Gemini
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Multilevel (M Multilevel (M- -ary) Phase Shift ary) Phase Shift
Keying Keying
Pages 117 Pages 117- -123 123
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The QPSK signal can be simulated in The QPSK signal can be simulated in Simulink Simulink using using
Subsystems Subsystems to simplify the design. to simplify the design.
4 4- -level Gray coded level Gray coded
symbol to bit symbol to bit
4 4- -level Gray coded level Gray coded
bit to symbol bit to symbol
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
QPSK I QPSK I- -Q correlation Q correlation
receiver receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The random binary data source is converted to an M = 4 The random binary data source is converted to an M = 4
level Gray encoded symbol by a level Gray encoded symbol by a Simulink Subsystem Simulink Subsystem. .
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray encoded by The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray encoded by
a a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block from the from the Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The M = 4 level symbol The M = 4 level symbol
(0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray (0, 1, 2 and 3) is Gray
encoded by a encoded by a Lookup Lookup
Table Block Table Block from the from the
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray encoded by The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, and 3) is Gray encoded by
a a Lookup Table Block Lookup Table Block by by mapping mapping [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2] [0, 1, 2, 3] to [0, 1, 3, 2]
Gray coding 00 00
01 01
10 11
11 10
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The M = 4 level symbol The M = 4 level symbol
is inputted to the Phase is inputted to the Phase
Modulator block with a Modulator block with a
carrier frequency carrier frequency f f
C C
= =
20 kHz, initial phase 20 kHz, initial phase

o o
= = /4 /4 and a phase and a phase
deviation factor deviation factor
k k
p p
= = /2 / V /2 / V
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, 3) and the carrier The M = 4 level symbol (0, 1, 2, 3) and the carrier
frequency frequency f f
C C
= 20 kHz, initial phase = 20 kHz, initial phase
o o
= = /4 /4 and a phase and a phase
deviation factor deviation factor k k
p p
= = /2 / V produces the phase shifts: /2 / V produces the phase shifts:
d d
i i
= 0 = 0 = = /4 + 0( /4 + 0( /2) = /2) = /4 /4
d d
i i
= 1 = 1 = = /4 + 1( /4 + 1( /2) = 3 /2) = 3 /4 /4
d d
i i
= 2 = 2 = = /4 + 2( /4 + 2( /2) = 5 /2) = 5 /4 /4
d d
i i
= 3 = 3 = = /4 + 3( /4 + 3( /2) = 7 /2) = 7 /4 /4
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The modulation The modulation phase shifts are the phase angle phase shifts are the phase angle of the of the
sinusoidal carrier A sin (2 sinusoidal carrier A sin (2 f f
C C
t + t + ) in QPSK. ) in QPSK.
d d
i i
= 0 = 0 = = /4 + 0( /4 + 0( /2) = /2) = /4 /4 45
d d
i i
= 1 = 1 = = /4 + 1( /4 + 1( /2) = 3 /2) = 3 /4 135 /4 135
d d
i i
= 2 = 2 = = /4 + 2( /4 + 2( /2) = 5 /2) = 5 /4 225 /4 225
d d
i i
= 3 = 3 = = /4 + 3( /4 + 3( /2) = 7 /2) = 7 /4 315 /4 315
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The QPSK signal can be resolved into In The QPSK signal can be resolved into In- -phase (I, cosine) phase (I, cosine)
and Quadrature (Q, sine) and Quadrature (Q, sine)
components. For example, components. For example,
if if = = /4 = 45 /4 = 45 : :
s s
1 1
(t) = A sin(2 (t) = A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 45 t + 45 ) = ) =
A / A / 2 [ I sin (2 2 [ I sin (2 f f
C C
t) t)
+ Q cos (2 + Q cos (2 f f
C C
t) ] = t) ] =
A / A / 2 [ sin (2 2 [ sin (2 f f
C C
t) t)
+ cos (2 + cos (2 f f
C C
t) ] t) ]
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -36 36 modified modified
sin In sin In- -phase phase
cos
Quadrature
constellation constellation
Plot Plot
+

EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5


The QPSK signal is derived from Gray coded dibits with The QPSK signal is derived from Gray coded dibits with
00 00 00 (0), 01 00 (0), 01 01 (1), 10 01 (1), 10 11 (3) and 11 11 (3) and 11 10 (2) 10 (2). .
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
QPSK signal QPSK signal
3 2 0 2 0 1 1 3 2 0 2 0 1 1 2 2
5 V, 5 V, f f
C C
= 2 kHz, = 2 kHz, r r
S S
= 500 Hz = 500 Hz
10 11 10 11 11 11 01 01 01 01 11 11
00 00 00 00
T T
S S
= = 2 msec 2 msec
Delay Delay
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The QPSK signal can be decomposed into I and Q BPSK The QPSK signal can be decomposed into I and Q BPSK
signals which are signals which are orthogonal orthogonal to each other. to each other.
QPSK signal, QPSK signal, f f
C C
= 2 kHz, = 2 kHz, r r
S S
= 500 b/sec = 500 b/sec
Binary PSK signal, sine carrier Binary PSK signal, sine carrier (I) (I)
Binary PSK signal, cosine carrier (Q) Binary PSK signal, cosine carrier (Q)
5 V 5 V
5 / 5 / 2 = 3.536 V 2 = 3.536 V
5 / 5 / 2 = 3.536 V 2 = 3.536 V
T T
S S
= 2 msec = 2 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The orthogonality orthogonality of the I and Q components of the QPSK of the I and Q components of the QPSK
signal can be exploited by the signal can be exploited by the universal coherent receiver universal coherent receiver. .
The orthogonal I and Q components actually occupy the The orthogonal I and Q components actually occupy the
same spectrum same spectrum without interference. The coherent without interference. The coherent
reference signals are: reference signals are:
Quadrature In Quadrature In- -phase phase
s s
1 1
(t) = cos (2 (t) = cos (2 f f
C C
t + t + ) s ) s
2 2
(t) = sin (2 (t) = sin (2 f f
C C
t + t + ) )
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -40 40
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The orthogonality of the QPSK signals can be shown by The orthogonality of the QPSK signals can be shown by
observing the output of the quadrature correlator to the I observing the output of the quadrature correlator to the I
and Q signal. and Q signal.
(

i
1 I Q
(i-1)
i
1 I
(i-1)
i
2
Q
(i-1)
1 Q
A
z (n ) = d sin(2 t) + d cos(2 t) cos (2 t) dt
2
A
z (n ) = d sin(2 t) cos (2 t) dt +
2
A
d cos (2 t) dt
2
A
z (n ) = d
2 2
S
S
S
S
S
S
T
S C C C
T
T
S C C
T
T
C
T
S
S
T f f f
T f f
f
T
T
z z
1 1
(nT (nT
S S
) )
S&M Eq. 5.109 S&M Eq. 5.109
0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of bit error The probability of bit error P P
b b
and the energy per bit and the energy per bit E E
b b
for a for a
QPSK signal is the same as that as for a BPSK signal but QPSK signal is the same as that as for a BPSK signal but
with a I and Q carrier amplitude of A / with a I and Q carrier amplitude of A / 2 2 . .
z z
1 1
(nT (nT
S S
) )
S&M Eq. 5.117 S&M Eq. 5.117
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2 2
2
A
= Q = Q
2
A
= Q = Q
2
b, PSK
b
b, BPSK
o o
b, QPSK
S
b, QPSK
o o
E
T
P
N N
E
T
P
N N
2 2
2 2
A
=
2
A
=
4
b
b, BPSK
S
b, QPSK
T
E
T
E
note T
S
note T
S
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Since Since T T
S S
= 2 = 2 T T
b b
BPSK and QPSK have the same BPSK and QPSK have the same P P
b b
but but
QPSK can have QPSK can have twice twice the data rate the data rate r r
b b
= 2 = 2 r r
S S
within the within the same same
bandwidth because of the orthogonal I and Q components. bandwidth because of the orthogonal I and Q components.
z z
1 1
(nT (nT
S S
) )
| |
| |
|
|
|
|
\ .
\ .
2 2
2 A
= = Q = Q
b b
b, BPSK b, QPSK
o o
E T
P P
N N
2 2
A
= =
2
b
b, BPSK b, QPSK
T
E E
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QPSK coherent digital communication system with BER QPSK coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: analysis:
MS Figure 3.22 MS Figure 3.22
4 4- -Level Gray coded Level Gray coded
bit to symbol bit to symbol
4 4- -Level Gray coded Level Gray coded
symbol to bit symbol to bit
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QPSK coherent digital communication system uses a QPSK coherent digital communication system uses a
4 4- -level Gray coded bit to symbol converter level Gray coded bit to symbol converter Simulink Simulink
Subsystem Subsystem. .
MS Figure 2.43 MS Figure 2.43
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QPSK coherent receiver uses an I QPSK coherent receiver uses an I- -Q correlator Q correlator Simulink Simulink
Subsystem Subsystem
MS Figure 3.24 MS Figure 3.24
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The I The I- -Q correlation receiver is the Q correlation receiver is the universal universal structure with structure with
an integration time equal to the an integration time equal to the symbol time T symbol time T
S S
. .
MS Figure 3.24 MS Figure 3.24
correlation receiver correlation receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The output of the I The output of the I- -Q correlation receiver is a Q correlation receiver is a dibit dibit and and
converted to an M = 2 converted to an M = 2
n n
= 4 level symbols (0, 1, 2, and 3). = 4 level symbols (0, 1, 2, and 3).
dibits M dibits M- -ary scaling ary scaling
MS Figure 3.24 MS Figure 3.24
correlation receiver correlation receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BER and P The BER and P
b b
comparison for 4 comparison for 4- -PSK (QPSK): PSK (QPSK):
Table 3.11 Table 3.11 Observed BER and Theoretical Upper Observed BER and Theoretical Upper- -Bound Bound
of of P P
b b
as a Function of as a Function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in a Gray coded 4 in a Gray coded 4- -PSK PSK
(QPSK) Digital Communication System with Optimum (QPSK) Digital Communication System with Optimum
Receiver Receiver
E E
d d
/ /N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 0 0 10 10
- -8 8
10 10 0 0 10 10
- -6 6
8 8 2 2 10 10
- -4 4
10 10
- -4 4
6 6 2.3 2.3 10 10
- -3 3
2.4 2.4 10 10
- -3 3
4 4 1.20 1.20 10 10
- -2 2
1.25 1.25 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 3.62 3.62 10 10
- -2 2
3.75 3.75 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 7.65 7.65 10 10
- -2 2
7.85 7.85 10 10
- -2 2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the QPSK power spectral density PSD of the QPSK
signal uses signal uses r r
s s
= = r r
b b
/2 and is: /2 and is:
G G
QPSK QPSK
(f (f) = 1/2 ) = 1/2 G G
PAM PAM
(f (f - - f f
C C
) )
G G
PAM PAM
(f (f) = A ) = A
2 2
/ / r r
s s
sinc sinc
2 2
( ( f / f / r r
s s
) )
No carrier No carrier
Sinc Sinc
2 2
r r
s s
= 500 s/sec, = 500 s/sec, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
MS Figure 3.25 MS Figure 3.25
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of BPSK has power spectral density PSD of BPSK has
double double the bandwidth than that for QPSK for the same bit the bandwidth than that for QPSK for the same bit
rate rate r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b, ,
No carrier No carrier
Sinc Sinc
2 2
r r
b b
= 1 kHz = 1 kHz
MS Figure 3.14 MS Figure 3.14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a QPSK signal as a percentage of total of a QPSK signal as a percentage of total
power is power is half half that for the same bit rate r that for the same bit rate r
b b
= 1/T = 1/T
b b
BPSK BPSK
signal since signal since r r
s s
= = r r
b b
/2 or /2 or T T
s s
= 2 = 2T T
b b
(MS Table 3.9). (MS Table 3.9).
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2/ 2/T T
s s
1/ 1/T T
b b
90% 90%
3/ 3/T T
s s
1.5/ 1.5/T T
b b
93% 93%
4/ 4/T T
s s
2/ 2/T T
b b
95% 95%
6/ 6/T T
s s
3/ 3/T T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
8/ 8/T T
s s
4/ 4/T T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
10/ 10/T T
s s
5/ 5/T T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
M M- -ary Bandpass Techniques: ary Bandpass Techniques:
8 8- -Phase Shift Keying Phase Shift Keying
Pages 286 Pages 286- -292 292
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
M M- -ary phase shift keying (M = 8 or 8PSK) source codes ary phase shift keying (M = 8 or 8PSK) source codes
tribits tribits b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
as a as a symbol symbol with one possible with one possible protocol protocol as: as:
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 000 A sin(2 000 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 0 t + 0 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 001 A sin(2 001 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 45 t + 45 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 011 A sin(2 011 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 90 t + 90 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 010 A sin(2 010 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 135 t + 135 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 110 A sin(2 110 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 180 t + 180 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 111 A sin(2 111 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 225 t + 225 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 101 A sin(2 101 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 270 t + 270 ) )
b b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= = 100 A sin(2 100 A sin(2 f f
C C
t + 315 t + 315 ) )

I, Q = 0, I, Q = 0, 1/ 1/ 2, 2, 1 1
s(t s(t) = ) = A [ I sin (2 A [ I sin (2 f f
C C
t) + t) +
Q cos (2 Q cos (2 f f
C C
t) ] t) ]
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -43 43
sin In sin In- -phase phase
Quadrature
cos
Constellation Plot Constellation Plot
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The correlation receiver The correlation receiver
for 8 for 8- -PSK uses four PSK uses four
reference signals: reference signals:
s s
ref ref n n
(t (t) = ) =
sin (2 sin (2 f f
C C
t + t +
n 45 n 45 + 22.5 + 22.5 ) )

n = 0, 1, 2, 3 n = 0, 1, 2, 3
= 22.5 = 22.5 , 67.5 , 67.5 , ,
112.5 112.5 , 157.5 , 157.5
S&M Eq. 5.124 S&M Eq. 5.124
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The output from any one of the four correlators is: The output from any one of the four correlators is:


i
1
(i-1)
i i
1
(i-1) (i-1)
1
z (n ) = A sin (2 t + ) sin (2 t + )dt
A
z (n ) = cos ( ) dt cos (4 t + + ) dt
2
A
z (n ) = cos ( )
2
S
S
S S
S S
T
S C C
T
T T
S C
T T
S
S
T f f
T f
T
T
z z
1 1
( (
n n
T T
S S
) )
S&M Eq. 5.125 S&M Eq. 5.125
0
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The correlator output is > 0 if | The correlator output is > 0 if | | < 90 | < 90 and < 0 if not and < 0 if not
because of the cos ( because of the cos ( ) term. For example, if s ) term. For example, if s
6 6
(t) is (t) is
received, the received, the ABCD ABCD correlator sign output is: correlator sign output is: +. The +. The
patterns of signs are unique and can be decoded to b patterns of signs are unique and can be decoded to b
i i- -2 2
b b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
(S&M Tab (S&M Tables 5 les 5- -7 and 5 7 and 5- -8) 8)
z z
1 1
( (
n n
T T
S S
) )
A: A: s s
ref ref 1 1
(t) (t)
B: B: s s
ref ref 2 2
(t) (t)
C: C: s s
ref ref 3 3
(t) (t)
D: D: s s
ref ref 4 4
(t) (t)
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of The probability of symbol error symbol error P P
S S
for coherently for coherently
demodulated M demodulated M- -ary PSK is: ary PSK is:
| |
|
|
\ .
| |
| |
|

|
|
\ .
\ .
2
2
2
2
A
2Q sin M 4
M

2Q 2 log M sin M 4
M
S
S coherent M-ary PSK
o
b
S coherent M-ary PSK
o
T
P
N
E
P
N
S&M Eq. 5.126 S&M Eq. 5.126
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -46 46
E E
b b
/ / N N
o o
dB dB
P P
s s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of The probability of symbol error symbol error P P
S S
for coherently for coherently
demodulated M demodulated M- -ary PSK is: ary PSK is:
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -46 46
E E
b b
/ /N N
o o
dB dB
P P
s s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of symbol error The probability of symbol error P P
S S
must be related to must be related to
probability of bit error probability of bit error P P
b b
for consistency. If for consistency. If Gray coding Gray coding is is
used, assume that errors will only be due to used, assume that errors will only be due to adjacent adjacent
symbols symbols. Thus each symbol error produces only one bit in . Thus each symbol error produces only one bit in
error and log error and log
2 2
(M (M 1) correct bits or: 1) correct bits or:
However for M However for M- -ary PSK with M > 4 the assumption of errors ary PSK with M > 4 the assumption of errors
being due to only adjacent symbols is invalid. For the being due to only adjacent symbols is invalid. For the
worst case there are M worst case there are M 1 incorrect symbols and in M / 2 of 1 incorrect symbols and in M / 2 of
these a bit will different from the correct bit so that: these a bit will different from the correct bit so that:
2
1
=
log M
b errors due to adjacent symbols S
P P
S&M Eq. 5.127 S&M Eq. 5.127

2
1 M

log M 2 (M 1)
S b S
P P P
S&M Eq. 5.129 S&M Eq. 5.129
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
M M- -ary Bandpass Techniques: ary Bandpass Techniques:
Quaternary Frequency Shift Keying Quaternary Frequency Shift Keying
Pages 292 Pages 292- -298 298
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The analytical signal for quaternary (M The analytical signal for quaternary (M- -ary, M = 2 ary, M = 2
n n
= 4) = 4)
frequency shift keying (QFSK or 4 frequency shift keying (QFSK or 4- -FSK) is: FSK) is:
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = (t) = A sin (2 A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ 3 + 3 f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 11 = 11
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 10 = 10
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 00 = 00
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
3 3 f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 01 = 01
f f
C C
+ 3 + 3 f f f f
C C
3 3 f f f f
C C
+ + f f f f
C C
f f f f
C C
+ 3 + 3 f f
11 00 01 10 11 11 00 01 10 11
MS Figure 3.19 MS Figure 3.19
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chose Chose f f
C C
and and f f so that if there are a whole number of half so that if there are a whole number of half
cycles of a sinusoid within a symbol time cycles of a sinusoid within a symbol time T T
S S
for M = 4 for for M = 4 for
orthogonality of the signals so that a correlation receiver orthogonality of the signals so that a correlation receiver
can be utilized. can be utilized.
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = (t) = A sin (2 A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ 3 + 3 f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 11 = 11
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ + f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 10 = 10
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 00 = 00
s s
4 4- -FSK FSK
(t) = A sin (2 (t) = A sin (2 ( (f f
C C
3 3 f f) t + ) t + ) if b ) if b
i i- -1 1
b b
i i
= 01 = 01
MS Figure 3.19 MS Figure 3.19
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The correlation receiver The correlation receiver
for 4 for 4- -FSK uses four FSK uses four
reference signals: reference signals:
s s
ref ref n n
(t (t) = ) =
sin (2 sin (2 ( (f f
C C
+ n + n f f) ) t) t)
n = n = 1, 1, 3 3
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -49 49
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of The probability of symbol error symbol error P P
S S
for coherently for coherently
demodulated M demodulated M- -ary FSK is: ary FSK is:
| |
|
|
\ .
=
| |
| |
|

|
|
\ .
\ .
2
S coherent M-ary FSK
S coherent M-ary FSK
2
A
P (M 1) Q M 4
2
P
(M 1) Q log M M 4
s
o
b
o
T
N
E
N
S&M Eq. 5.132 S&M Eq. 5.132
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -51 51
E E
b b
/N /N
o o
dB dB
P P
s s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The probability of The probability of symbol error symbol error P P
S S
for coherently for coherently
demodulated M demodulated M- -ary FSK is: ary FSK is:
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -51 51
E E
b b
/ /N N
o o
dB dB
P P
s s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Multilevel (M Multilevel (M- -ary) Frequency ary) Frequency
Shift Keying Shift Keying
Pages 110 Pages 110- -116 116
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
4 4- -FSK coherent digital communication system with BER FSK coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: analysis:
MS Figure 3.18 MS Figure 3.18
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The dibits are converted to a symbol and scaled. The data The dibits are converted to a symbol and scaled. The data
is is not not Gray encoded. For M Gray encoded. For M- -ary FSK symbol errors are ary FSK symbol errors are
equally likely among the M equally likely among the M 1 correlators and there is 1 correlators and there is no no
advantage advantage to Gray encoding. to Gray encoding.
MS Figure 3.18 MS Figure 3.18
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
4 4- -FSK coherent digital communication system with BER FSK coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: analysis:
4 4- -FSK correlation receiver FSK correlation receiver
MS Figure 3.18 MS Figure 3.18
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
4 4- -FSK coherent digital communication system with BER FSK coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: analysis:
4 4- -FSK correlation receiver FSK correlation receiver
MS Figure 3.20 MS Figure 3.20
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The 4 The 4- -FSK correlation FSK correlation
receiver has four receiver has four
correlators with an correlators with an
integration time equal integration time equal
to the to the symbol time T symbol time T
S S
. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The symbols are converted to dibits. The original data is The symbols are converted to dibits. The original data is
not not Gray encoded and is therefore Gray encoded and is therefore not not Gray decoded Gray decoded. .
MS Figure 3.18 MS Figure 3.18
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The BER and P The BER and P
b b
comparison for 4 comparison for 4- -FSK: FSK:
Table 3.10 Table 3.10 Observed BER and Theoretical Upper Bound Observed BER and Theoretical Upper Bound
of of P P
b b
as a Function of as a Function of E E
b b
/ N / N
o o
in 4 in 4- -level FSK Digital level FSK Digital
Communication System with Optimum Receiver Communication System with Optimum Receiver
E E
d d
/ /N N
o o
dB dB BER BER P P
b b
0 0 0 0
12 12 0 0 10 10
- -8 8
10 10 0 0 10 10
- -6 6
8 8 1 1 10 10
- -4 4
10 10
- -4 4
6 6 5.1 5.1 10 10
- -3 3
4.8 4.8 10 10
- -3 3
4 4 2.26 2.26 10 10
- -2 2
2.52 2.52 10 10
- -2 2
2 2 5.97 5.97 10 10
- -2 2
7.54 7.54 10 10
- -2 2
0 0 1.209 1.209 10 10
- -1 1
1.586 1.586 10 10
- -1 1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD with a power spectral density PSD with a
minimum carrier frequency deviation (MFSK) for M minimum carrier frequency deviation (MFSK) for M- -ary ary
FSK is FSK is f f = 1/2 = 1/2T T
S S
= = r r
S S
/2. /2. For MFSK the carriers should be For MFSK the carriers should be
spaced at multiples of 2 spaced at multiples of 2 f = 1/ f = 1/T T
S S
= = r r
S S
(S&M Eq. 5.131 is (S&M Eq. 5.131 is
incorrect incorrect). Here ). Here f f = 2 = 2 r r
S S
= 1 kHz
Sinc Sinc
2 2
r r
s s
= 500 s/sec, = 500 s/sec, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
MS Figure 3.21 MS Figure 3.21
f f = 1 kHz = 1 kHz
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of a M of a M- -ary FSK signal as a percentage of ary FSK signal as a percentage of
total power (MS Table 3.9). total power (MS Table 3.9).
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2( M 2( M 1) 1) f f + + 4/ 4/T T
s s
95% 95%
2 (M 2 (M 1) 1) f f + + 6/ 6/T T
s s
96.5% 96.5%
2 (M 2 (M 1) 1) f f + + 8/ 8/T T
s s
97.5% 97.5%
2 (M 2 (M 1) 1) f f + + 10/ 10/T T
s s
98% 98%
For MFSK: For MFSK: f f = 1/2 = 1/2T T
S S
= = r r
S S
/2 /2
M = 2 M = 2
n n
and and r r
S S
= = r r
b b
/n /n
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
M M- -ary Bandpass Techniques: ary Bandpass Techniques:
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Pages 298 Pages 298- -301 301
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The analytical signal for quadrature amplitude modulation The analytical signal for quadrature amplitude modulation
(QAM) has I (QAM) has I- -Q components: Q components:
s s
QAM QAM
(t (t) = I sin (2 ) = I sin (2 f f
C C
t t) + Q cos (2 ) + Q cos (2 f f
C C
t t) )
A QAM signal has A QAM signal has both both
amplitude amplitude and and phase phase
components which can be components which can be
shown in the shown in the constellation constellation
plot plot. .
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -53 53
I
Q
16-ary
QAM
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
An M An M- -ary PSK signal also has I ary PSK signal also has I- -Q components but the Q components but the
amplitude is amplitude is constant constant and only the phase and only the phase varies varies: :
s s
QAM QAM
(t (t) = I sin (2 ) = I sin (2 f f
C C
t t) + Q cos (2 ) + Q cos (2 f f
C C
t t) )
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -54 54
I I
Q Q
I I
Q Q
16 16- -ary ary
PSK PSK
16 16- -ary ary
QAM QAM
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The orthogonality orthogonality of the I and Q components of the QAM of the I and Q components of the QAM
signal can be exploited by the signal can be exploited by the universal coherent receiver universal coherent receiver. .
The orthogonal I and Q components actually occupy the The orthogonal I and Q components actually occupy the
same spectrum same spectrum without interference. The coherent without interference. The coherent
reference signals are: reference signals are:
Quadrature In Quadrature In- -phase phase
s s
1 1
(t) = cos (2 (t) = cos (2 f f
C C
t t) s ) s
2 2
(t) = sin (2 (t) = sin (2 f f
C C
t t) )
S&M Figure 5 S&M Figure 5- -55 55
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
An An upper upper- -bound bound for the probability of for the probability of symbol error symbol error P P
S S
for for
coherently demodulated M coherently demodulated M- -ary QAM is: ary QAM is:
4
| |

|
|

\ .
S coherent M-ary QAM
3
P Q
(M 1)
s
o
E
N
S&M Eq. 5.135 S&M Eq. 5.135
QAM BER curve QAM BER curve
M = 256 M = 256
M = 4 M = 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
An M An M- -ary QAM constellation plot shows the ary QAM constellation plot shows the stability stability of the of the
signaling and the signaling and the transition transition from one signal to another: from one signal to another:
256 256- -ary QAM ary QAM
16 16- -ary QAM ary QAM
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Bandpass Modulation and
Bandpass Modulation and
Demodulation
Demodulation
Quadrature Amplitude Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation Modulation
Pages 123 Pages 123- -130 130
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: analysis:
MS Figure 3.26 MS Figure 3.26
16 16- -QAM correlation QAM correlation
receiver receiver
4 bit to I,Q symbol 4 bit to I,Q symbol
QAM QAM
16 16- -level symbol to bit level symbol to bit
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: 4 bit to I analysis: 4 bit to I- -Q symbol S Q symbol Simulink imulink subsystem. subsystem.
MS Figure 3.27 MS Figure 3.27
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: Table 3.12 I and Q output amplitudes analysis: Table 3.12 I and Q output amplitudes
Input I Input I Q Q Input Input I I Q Q Input Input I I Q Q
0 0 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 3 1 3 10 10 3 3 1 1
1 1 3 3 1 1 6 6 3 1 3 1 11 11 3 3 3 3
2 2 1 1 3 3 7 7 3 3 3 3 12 12 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 8 8 1 1 1 1 13 13 3 3 1 1
4 4 1 1 1 1 9 9 1 1 3 3 14 14 1 1 3 3
15 15 3 3 2 2
MS Figure 3.27 MS Figure 3.27
I LUT I LUT 1 to 1 to 3 3
Q LUT Q LUT
symbol 0 to 15 symbol 0 to 15
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: QAM modulator S analysis: QAM modulator Simulink imulink subsystem. subsystem.
MS Figure 3.27 MS Figure 3.27
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: 16 analysis: 16- -QAM correlation receiver S QAM correlation receiver Simulink imulink subsystem. subsystem.
MS Figure 3.30 MS Figure 3.30
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital QAM coherent digital
communication system communication system
with BER analysis: with BER analysis:
Table 3.14 I, Q Symbol LUT Table 3.14 I, Q Symbol LUT
16 16- -level output amplitudes level output amplitudes
I I Q Q Output Output I I Q Q Output Output
1 1 1 1 11 11 3 3 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 2 9 9 3 3 2 2 0 0
1 1 3 3 14 14 3 3 3 3 4 4
1 1 4 4 15 15 3 3 4 4 6 6
2 2 1 1 10 10 4 4 1 1 3 3
2 2 2 2 8 8 4 4 2 2 2 2
2 2 3 3 12 12 4 4 3 3 5 5
2 2 4 4 13 13 4 4 4 4 7 7
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: 16 level symbol to 4 bit S analysis: 16 level symbol to 4 bit Simulink imulink subsystem. subsystem.
MS Figure 3.31 MS Figure 3.31
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
QAM coherent digital communication system with BER QAM coherent digital communication system with BER
analysis: 16 level symbol to 4 bit S analysis: 16 level symbol to 4 bit Simulink imulink subsystem. subsystem.
MS Figure 3.31 MS Figure 3.31
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The single single- -sided sided power spectral density PSD of the 16 power spectral density PSD of the 16- -ary ary
QAM has a bandwidth of 1/M that of a PSK signal with the QAM has a bandwidth of 1/M that of a PSK signal with the
same data rate same data rate r r
b b
. .
Sinc Sinc
2 2
r r
s s
= 250 s/sec, = 250 s/sec, r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
MS Figure 3.32 MS Figure 3.32 no discrete no discrete
component at f component at f
C C
= =
20 kHz 20 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
BPSK PSD BPSK PSD
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
16 16- -ary QAM PSD ary QAM PSD
r r
b b
= 1 kb/sec M = 4 = 1 kb/sec M = 4
r r
S S
= 250 s/sec = 250 s/sec
1 kHz 1 kHz
250 Hz 250 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The bandwidth bandwidth of an M of an M- -ary QAM signal as a percentage of ary QAM signal as a percentage of
total power is 1/n total power is 1/n that for the same bit rate that for the same bit rate r r
b b
= 1/ = 1/T T
b b
BPSK BPSK
signal since signal since r r
s s
= = r r
b b
/n or /n or T T
s s
= n = nT T
b b
where M = 2 where M = 2
n n
(MS Table (MS Table
3.14). 3.14).
Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power Bandwidth (Hz) Percentage of Total Power
2/ 2/T T
s s
2/n 2/nT T
b b
90% 90%
3/ 3/T T
s s
3/n 3/nT T
b b
93% 93%
4/ 4/T T
s s
4/n 4/nT T
b b
95% 95%
6/ 6/T T
s s
6/n 6/nT T
b b
96.5% 96.5%
8/ 8/T T
s s
8/n 8/nT T
b b
97.5% 97.5%
10/ 10/T T
s s
10/n 10/nT T
b b
98% 98%
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
16 16- -QAM coherent digital communication system received QAM coherent digital communication system received
I I- -Q components can be displayed on as a Q components can be displayed on as a signal trajectory signal trajectory
or or constellation plot constellation plot . .
Figure 3.42 Figure 3.42
real real- -imaginary (a + b j) imaginary (a + b j)
conversion to complex conversion to complex
polar (M polar (M exp(j exp(j )) conversion )) conversion
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The The Real Real- -Imaginary to Imaginary to
Complex Complex conversion block conversion block
is in the is in the Math Operations Math Operations, ,
Simulink Simulink Blockset Blockset
Figure 3.42 Figure 3.42
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The constellation plot The constellation plot
(scatter plot) and (scatter plot) and
signal trajectory are signal trajectory are
Comm Comm Sinks Sinks blocks blocks
from fromthe the
Communications Communications
Blockset Blockset
Figure 3.42 Figure 3.42
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The 16 The 16- -ary QAM I ary QAM I- -Q component constellation plot with Q component constellation plot with
E E
b b
/ /N N
o o
(MS Figures 3.43, 3.45) (MS Figures 3.43, 3.45). .
signal points signal points
signal transitions signal transitions
decision boundaries decision boundaries
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The 16 The 16- -ary QAM I ary QAM I- -Q component constellation plot with Q component constellation plot with
E E
b b
/ /N N
o o
= = 12 dB, 12 dB, P P
b b
10 10
- -4 4
(MS Figures 3.44, 3.46 (top)) (MS Figures 3.44, 3.46 (top))
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The 16 The 16- -ary QAM I ary QAM I- -Q component constellation plot with Q component constellation plot with
E E
b b
/ /N N
o o
= 6 = 6 dB, dB, P P
b b
= 3.67 = 3.67 x 10 x 10
- -4 4
(MS Figures 3.44, 3.46 ( (MS Figures 3.44, 3.46 (bot bot)) ))
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
End of Chapter 5
End of Chapter 5
Digital Bandpass Modulation
Digital Bandpass Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Techniques
Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Modulation
Pages 306 Pages 306- -309 309
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for double sideband, large carrier The analytical signal for double sideband, large carrier
amplitude modulation (DSB amplitude modulation (DSB- -LC AM) is: LC AM) is:
s s
DSB DSB- -LC LC AM AM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
(c + (c + s(t s(t)) )) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) t)
where where c c is the is the DC bias DC bias or or offset offset and and A A
C C
is the carrier is the carrier
amplitude. The continuous analog signal amplitude. The continuous analog signal s(t) s(t) is a baseband is a baseband
signal with the information content (voice or music) to be signal with the information content (voice or music) to be
transmitted. transmitted.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The baseband power spectral density (PSD) spectrum of The baseband power spectral density (PSD) spectrum of
the information signal the information signal s(t s(t) or ) or S(f S(f) for voice has significant ) for voice has significant
components below 500 Hz and a bandwidth of < 8 kHz: components below 500 Hz and a bandwidth of < 8 kHz:
S(f S(f) = ) =
F
F(s(t (s(t)) ))
The The single single- -sided sided spectrum of the modulated signal is: spectrum of the modulated signal is:
F
F(A (A
C C
(c + (c + s(t s(t)) )) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t t)) = )) = S(f S(f f f
C C
) )
Power Spectral Density of s(t) Power Spectral Density of s(t)
500 Hz 500 Hz 8 kHz 8 kHz
dB dB
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The single single- -sided sided (positive frequency axis) spectrum of the (positive frequency axis) spectrum of the
modulated signal modulated signal replicates the baseband spectrum as a replicates the baseband spectrum as a
double double- -sided sided spectrum about the carrier frequency. spectrum about the carrier frequency.
Carrier 25 kHz Carrier 25 kHz
Double Double- -sided spectrum sided spectrum
Baseband spectrum Baseband spectrum
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The double double- -sided modulated spectrum about the carrier sided modulated spectrum about the carrier
frequency has an frequency has an lower lower ( (LSB LSB) and ) and upper upper ( (USB USB) sideband. ) sideband.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The modulated DSB The modulated DSB- -LC AM signal shows an LC AM signal shows an outer envelope outer envelope
that follows the polar baseband signal s(t) that follows the polar baseband signal s(t). .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for double sideband, suppressed The analytical signal for double sideband, suppressed
carrier amplitude modulation (DSB carrier amplitude modulation (DSB- -SC AM) is: SC AM) is:
s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC AM AM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
s(t) s(t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) t)
where where A A
C C
is the carrier amplitude. The is the carrier amplitude. The single single- -sided sided
spectrum of the modulated signal replicates the baseband spectrum of the modulated signal replicates the baseband
spectrum as a double spectrum as a double- -sided spectrum about the carrier sided spectrum about the carrier
frequency frequency but but without without a carrier component. a carrier component.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for double sideband, suppressed The analytical signal for double sideband, suppressed
carrier amplitude modulation (DSB carrier amplitude modulation (DSB- -SC AM) is: SC AM) is:
s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC AM AM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
s(t) s(t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) t)
where where A A
C C
is the carrier amplitude. The modulated signal is the carrier amplitude. The modulated signal
s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC AM AM
(t (t) looks similar to s(t) but has a temporal but not ) looks similar to s(t) but has a temporal but not
spectral carrier component. spectral carrier component.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -LC AM and the DSB LC AM and the DSB- -SC AM modulated signals SC AM modulated signals
have the same have the same sidebands sidebands. .
Carrier 25 kHz
DSB-LC AM
DSB-SC AM No carrier
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The modulated DSB The modulated DSB- -LC AM and the DSC LC AM and the DSC- -SC AM signals SC AM signals
are different. are different.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The modulated DSB The modulated DSB- -SC AM signal has an SC AM signal has an envelope envelope that that
follows the polar baseband signal s(t) but not an outer follows the polar baseband signal s(t) but not an outer
envelope envelope. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Coherent Demodulation Coherent Demodulation
of AM Signals of AM Signals
Pages 309 Pages 309- -315 315
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -SC AM SC AM coherent receiver coherent receiver has a has a bandpass filter bandpass filter
centered at f centered at f
C C
and with a bandwidth of and with a bandwidth of twice twice the bandwidth the bandwidth
of s(t) because of the LSB and USB of s(t) because of the LSB and USB. The output of the . The output of the
multiplier is multiplier is lowpass filtered lowpass filtered with a bandwidth equal to with a bandwidth equal to
the bandwidth of s(t). the bandwidth of s(t).
r(t r(t) = ) = s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC
(t (t) + ) + n(t n(t) )
The DSB The DSB- -SC AM received signal is r(t) = SC AM received signal is r(t) = s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC
(t (t) + ) + n(t n(t). ).
The bandpass filter passes the modulated signal but filters The bandpass filter passes the modulated signal but filters
the noise: the noise:
z(t z(t) = ) = s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC
(t (t) + n ) + n
o o
(t) S&M Eq. 6.3 (t) S&M Eq. 6.3
n n
o o
(t) has a Gaussian distribution. The bandpass filter has a (t) has a Gaussian distribution. The bandpass filter has a
center frequency of f center frequency of f
C C
= 25 kHz and a = 25 kHz and a - -3 dB bandwidth of 8 3 dB bandwidth of 8
kHz (25 kHz (25 4 kHz). 4 kHz).
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The filter noise n The filter noise n
o o
(t) has a (t) has a flat power spectral density flat power spectral density
within the bandwidth of the bandpass filter: within the bandwidth of the bandpass filter:
PSD
n
o
(t)
f
C
= 25 kHz
21 kHz 29 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The filter noise n The filter noise n
o o
(t) can be described as a (t) can be described as a quadrature quadrature
representation: representation:
n n
o o
(t) = (t) = W W(t) (t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t t) + ) + Z Z(t) sin ( (t) sin (2 2 f f
C C
t t) S&M Eq. 5.62R ) S&M Eq. 5.62R
In the coherent receiver the noise is processed: In the coherent receiver the noise is processed:
n n
o o
(t) (t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t t) ) = = W W(t) cos (t) cos
2 2
(2 (2 f f
C C
t t) + S&M Eq. 6.5 ) + S&M Eq. 6.5
Z Z(t) (t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t t) ) sin (2 sin (2 f f
C C
t t) )
PSD
f
C
= 25 kHz
21 kHz 29 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Applying the Applying the trignometric trignometric identity identity the filter noise n the filter noise n
o o
(t) is: (t) is:
n n
o o
(t) (t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t t) ) = = W W(t) (t) + W W(t) (t) cos cos (4 (4 f f
C C
t t) + ) +
Z Z(t) sin (4 (t) sin (4 f f
C C
t t) S&M Eq. 6.5 ) S&M Eq. 6.5
After the lowpass filter in the receiver the demodulated After the lowpass filter in the receiver the demodulated
signal is: signal is:
s s
demod demod
(t) = (t) = A A
C C
s(t) + s(t) + W W(t) (t) S&M Eq. 6.7 S&M Eq. 6.7
PSD
f
C
= 25 kHz
21 kHz 29 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The transmitted DSB The transmitted DSB- -SC AM signal is: SC AM signal is:
s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC AM AM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
s(t) s(t) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) t)
The average normalized bi The average normalized bi- -sided power of sided power of s s
DSB DSB- -SC SC
(t (t) is ) is
found in the spectral domain with found in the spectral domain with S(f S(f) = ) =
F
F (s(t)): (s(t)):
[ ]

2
2
trans C C
1
P = A S(f f ) + S(f +f ) df
2
S&M Eq. 6.8 S&M Eq. 6.8
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The dual The dual- -sided spectral do not sided spectral do not overlap overlap (at zero frequency) (at zero frequency)
and the and the cross terms cross terms are zero so that: are zero so that:
where P where P
s s
is the average normalized power of s(t). is the average normalized power of s(t).
[ ]

2
2
trans DSB-SC C DSB-SC C
2
trans s
1
P = A S (f f ) + S (f +f ) df
2
A
P = P
2
S&M Eq. 6.9 S&M Eq. 6.9
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The average normalized power of s(t) is found in the average normalized power of s(t) is found in the
spectral domain: spectral domain:
In a In a noiseless channel noiseless channel the power in the demodulated the power in the demodulated
DSB DSB- -SC AM signal is: SC AM signal is:

2 2
s C
P = S(f) df = S(f +f ) df
S&M Eq. 6.10 S&M Eq. 6.10
= =
2
2 2
demod, noiseless s trans
1
P A P P
4 2
S&M Eq. 6.11 S&M Eq. 6.11
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The average normalized power of the processed noise is: average normalized power of the processed noise is:
The signal The signal- -to to- -noise power ratio then is: noise power ratio then is:
=
processed noise o
1
P N (2 B)
4
= =
2
2
trans
trans
coherent DSB-SC
o
o

P
P
2
SNR
1
N B
N (2 B)
4
S&M Eq. 6.12 S&M Eq. 6.12
2 B 2 B
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -SC AM coherent receiver SC AM coherent receiver requires a phase requires a phase
and frequency synchronous reference signal. If the and frequency synchronous reference signal. If the
reference signal has a reference signal has a phase error phase error then: then:
S&M Eq. 6.17 S&M Eq. 6.17

=
coherent DSB-SC phase error
2 2
trans
o
SNR
cos P
N B
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -SC AM coherent receiver SC AM coherent receiver requires a phase requires a phase
and frequency synchronous reference signal. If the and frequency synchronous reference signal. If the
reference signal has a reference signal has a frequency error frequency error f f then: then:
S S
demod demod frequency frequency error error
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
s(t) cos (2 s(t) cos (2 f t) f t)
+ + X X(t (t) cos (2 ) cos (2 f t) f t)
+ + Y Y(t (t) sin (2 ) sin (2 f t) S&M Eq. 6.18 f t) S&M Eq. 6.18
Although the noise component remains the same, the Although the noise component remains the same, the
amplitude amplitude of the demodulated signal varies with of the demodulated signal varies with f f: :
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Non Non- -coherent Demodulation coherent Demodulation
of AM Signals of AM Signals
Pages 315 Pages 315- -326 326
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The non non- -coherent AM coherent AM (DSB (DSB- -LC) receiver uses an LC) receiver uses an envelope envelope
detector detector implemented as a implemented as a semiconductor diode semiconductor diode and a and a low low- -
pass filter pass filter: :
The DSB The DSB- -LC AM analytical signal is: LC AM analytical signal is:
s s
DSB DSB- -LC LC AM AM
(t (t) = A ) = A
C C
(c + (c + s(t s(t)) cos (2 )) cos (2 f f
C C
t) t)
where c is the DC bias (offset). where c is the DC bias (offset).
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The envelope detector is a The envelope detector is a half half- -wave rectifier wave rectifier and and
provides a provides a DC bias DC bias ( (c c) to the processed DSB ) to the processed DSB- -LC AM LC AM
signal : signal :
c = DC bias
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 5
The output of the half The output of the half- -wave diode rectifier is low wave diode rectifier is low- -pass pass
filtered to remove the carrier frequency and outputs the filtered to remove the carrier frequency and outputs the
envelope which is the information: envelope which is the information:
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -LC AM signal can be decomposed as: LC AM signal can be decomposed as:
s s
DSB DSB- -LC LC AM AM
(t (t) = ) = s(t s(t) ) cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) + A t) + A
C C
c c cos cos (2 (2 f f
C C
t) t)
S&M Eq. 6.20R S&M Eq. 6.20R
The average normalized power of the information term: The average normalized power of the information term:
=
2
C
info term S
A
P P
2
S&M Eq. 6.23 S&M Eq. 6.23
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The average normalized transmitted power is: The average normalized transmitted power is:
Since Since s(t s(t) + c must be >= 0 to avoid distortion in the ) + c must be >= 0 to avoid distortion in the
DSB DSB- -LC AM signal: c LC AM signal: c | min [ | min [s(t s(t)] | or c )] | or c
2 2
s s
2 2
(t) for all t. (t) for all t.
[ ]
=
=

T
2
carrier term C C
0
2 2
C
carrier term
1
P A c cos(2f t) dt
T
A c
P
2
S&M Eq. 6.24 S&M Eq. 6.24
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Therefore c Therefore c
2 2
P P
s s
and for DSB and for DSB- -LC AM LC AM: :
The power efficiency The power efficiency of a DSB of a DSB- -LC AM signal is: LC AM signal is:

carrier term info term


P P
S&M Eq. 6.28 S&M Eq. 6.28

info term info term
carrier term info term trans DSB-LCAM term
P P
= = 0.5
P + P P
S&M Eq. 6.29 S&M Eq. 6.29
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The DSB The DSB- -LC AM signal LC AM signal wastes wastes at least half the at least half the
transmitted power because the power in the carrier term transmitted power because the power in the carrier term
has no information: has no information:
The The modulation index modulation index m is defined as: m is defined as:

carrier term info term


P P
0.5
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
max s(t) + c min s(t) + c
m =
max s(t) + c + min s(t) + c
S&M Eq. 6.30 S&M Eq. 6.30
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The modulation index modulation index m defines the power efficiency but m defines the power efficiency but
m m must be less than 1. If m > 1 then min [ must be less than 1. If m > 1 then min [s(t s(t) + c] < 0 and ) + c] < 0 and
distortion occurs. distortion occurs.
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
max s(t) + c min s(t) + c
m =
max s(t) + c + min s(t) + c
S&M Eq. 6.30 S&M Eq. 6.30
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The average normalized power of the demodulation average normalized power of the demodulation
noiseless DSB noiseless DSB- -LC AM signal is: LC AM signal is:
Then the signal Then the signal- -to to- -noise power ratio for the DSB noise power ratio for the DSB- -LC AM LC AM
signal is: signal is:
=
2
demod, noiseless info term
P 2 P
= =
2 2
info term trans DSB-LC
noncoherent DSB-LC
o o
2 P P
SNR
N (2 B) N B
S&M Eq. 6.40 S&M Eq. 6.40
2 B 2 B
S&M Eq. 6.39 S&M Eq. 6.39
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The non non- -coherent AM coherent AM (DSB (DSB- -LC) receiver is the LC) receiver is the crystal crystal
radio radio which needs no batteries! Power for the high which needs no batteries! Power for the high- -
impedance ceramic earphone is obtained directly from the impedance ceramic earphone is obtained directly from the
transmitted signal transmitted signal. For simplicity, the RF BPF is omitted . For simplicity, the RF BPF is omitted
and the audio frequency filter is a simple and the audio frequency filter is a simple RC RC network. network.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Frequency Modulation and Frequency Modulation and
Phase Modulation Phase Modulation
Pages 334 Pages 334- -343 343
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for an The analytical signal for an analog phase modulated analog phase modulated (PM) (PM)
signal is: signal is:
s s
PM PM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
cos cos [2 [2 f f
C C
t + t + s(t s(t)] S&M Eq. 6.53 )] S&M Eq. 6.53
where where is the is the phase modulation constant phase modulation constant rad rad/V and /V and A A
C C
is is
the carrier amplitude. The continuous analog signal the carrier amplitude. The continuous analog signal s(t) s(t) is a is a
baseband signal with the information content (voice or baseband signal with the information content (voice or
music) to be transmitted. music) to be transmitted.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for an The analytical signal for an analog frequency modulated analog frequency modulated
(FM) signal is: (FM) signal is:
s s
FM FM
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
cos cos{ 2 { 2 [f [f
C C
+ k + k s(t s(t)] t + )] t + ] S&M Eq. 6.53 ] S&M Eq. 6.53
where where k k is the is the frequency modulation constant frequency modulation constant Hz / V, Hz / V, A A
C C
is the carrier amplitude and is the carrier amplitude and is the initial phase angle at is the initial phase angle at
t = 0. t = 0. The continuous analog signal The continuous analog signal s(t s(t) ) is a baseband is a baseband
signal with the information content. signal with the information content.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The instantaneous phase instantaneous phase of the PM signal is: of the PM signal is:

PM PM
(t (t) = 2 ) = 2 f f
C C
t + t + s(t s(t) S&M Eq. 6.56 ) S&M Eq. 6.56
The The instantaneous phase instantaneous phase of the FM signal is: of the FM signal is:

FM FM
(t (t) = ) = 2 2 [f [f
C C
+ k + k s(t s(t)] t + )] t + ] S&M Eq. 6.57 ] S&M Eq. 6.57
The instantaneous phase is also call the The instantaneous phase is also call the angle angle of the signal of the signal. .
The The instantaneous frequency instantaneous frequency is the time rate of change of is the time rate of change of
the angle: the angle:
f(t f(t) = (1/2 ) = (1/2 ) ) d d (t) / (t) / dt dt S&M Eq. 6.58 S&M Eq. 6.58
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The instantaneous frequency of the unmodulated carrier The instantaneous frequency of the unmodulated carrier
signal is: signal is:
f f
carrier carrier
(t (t) = d ) = d
carrier carrier
(t (t) / ) / dt dt = = d/dt d/dt {2 {2 f f
C C
t t + + } S&M Eq. 6.59 } S&M Eq. 6.59
The instantaneous phase is also: The instantaneous phase is also:
t t t t
(t) = (t) = f ( f ( ) d ) d = = f ( f ( ) d ) d + S&M Eq. 6.60 S&M Eq. 6.60
- - 0 0
There are There are practical limits practical limits on instantaneous frequency and on instantaneous frequency and
instantaneous phase. To avoid ambiguity and distortion in instantaneous phase. To avoid ambiguity and distortion in
FM signals due to FM signals due to phase wrapping phase wrapping: :
k k s(t s(t) ) f f
C C
for all t S&M Eq. 6.61 for all t S&M Eq. 6.61
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
To avoid ambiguity and distortion in PM signals due to To avoid ambiguity and distortion in PM signals due to
phase wrapping: phase wrapping:
- - < < s(t s(t) ) radians for all t S&M Eq. 6.61 radians for all t S&M Eq. 6.61
Since FM and PM are both change the angle of the carrier Since FM and PM are both change the angle of the carrier
signal as a function of the analog information signal signal as a function of the analog information signal s(t s(t), FM ), FM
and PM are called and PM are called angle modulation angle modulation. .
For example, is this signal FM, PM or neither: For example, is this signal FM, PM or neither:
t t
x(t x(t) = A ) = A
C C
cos cos { 2 { 2 f f
C C
t t + + k s( k s( ) d ) d + + } } S&M Eq. 6.60 S&M Eq. 6.60
- -
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The instantaneous phase of the signal is: The instantaneous phase of the signal is:
t t

x x
(t (t) = 2 ) = 2 f f
C C
t t + + k s( k s( ) d ) d + + S&M Eq. p. 336 S&M Eq. p. 336
- -
which is which is not not a linear function of a linear function of s(t s(t) so the signal is ) so the signal is not PM not PM. .
The instantaneous frequency of the signal is: The instantaneous frequency of the signal is:
f f
x x
(t (t) = (1/2 ) = (1/2 ) ) d d
x x
(t (t) / ) / dt dt = = f f
C C
+ k + k s(t s(t) / 2 ) / 2
and the frequency difference and the frequency difference f f
x x
f f
C C
is a linear function of is a linear function of s(t s(t) )
so the signal is FM. so the signal is FM.
The The maximum phase deviation maximum phase deviation of a PM signal is of a PM signal is
max | max | s(t s(t) |. The ) |. The maximum frequency deviation maximum frequency deviation of a FM of a FM
signal is signal is f = max | k f = max | k s(t s(t) |. ) |.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The spectrum of a PM or FM signal can be developed as The spectrum of a PM or FM signal can be developed as
follows: S&M follows: S&M Eqs Eqs. 6.64 through 6.71 . 6.64 through 6.71
C C m
C m
C m
C m C m
C
v(t) = A sin(2 f t + sin 2 f t)
v(t) = Re { exp(j 2 f t + j sin 2 f t) }
exp(j 2 f t + j sin 2 f t) =
cos (2 f t + sin 2 f t) + j sin (2 f t + sin 2 f t)
v(t) = Im { A exp(2
now
( )

C m
m n m
n = -
m n m
n = -
f t + j sin 2 f t) }
exp(j sin 2 f t) = c exp(j 2 n f t)
exp(j sin 2 f t) = J exp(j 2 n f t)
now
after further development Bessel function of the first kind Bessel function of the first kind
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Bessel functions of the first kind Bessel functions of the first kind J J
n n
( ( ) ) are tabulated for FM are tabulated for FM
with single tone f with single tone f
m m
angle modulation (S&M Table 6.1): angle modulation (S&M Table 6.1):
n

EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6


For single tone f For single tone f
m m
angle modulation the spectrum is periodic angle modulation the spectrum is periodic
and infinite in extent and infinite in extent: :
n

( )

C n m C
n = -
v(t) = A J sin[2 (n f + f ) t]
S&M Eq. 6.72 S&M Eq. 6.72
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The complexity complexity of the Bessel function solution for the of the Bessel function solution for the
spectrum of a single tone angle modulation can be spectrum of a single tone angle modulation can be
simplified by the simplified by the Carson Carson s Rule approximation s Rule approximation for the for the
bandwidth bandwidth B B. Since . Since = = f / f f / f
m m
: :
B = 2 ( B = 2 ( + 1) f + 1) f
m m
= 2 ( = 2 ( f + f f + f
m m
) Hz ) Hz
n

S&M Eq. 6.74 S&M Eq. 6.74


EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Carson Carson s Rule s Rule for the approximate bandwidth of an angle for the approximate bandwidth of an angle
modulated signal was developed by John R. Carson in modulated signal was developed by John R. Carson in
1922 while he worked at AT&T. Prior to this in 1915 he 1922 while he worked at AT&T. Prior to this in 1915 he
presaged the concept of presaged the concept of bandwidth bandwidth
efficiency efficiency in AM by proposing in AM by proposing
the suppression of a sideband the suppression of a sideband
(see S&M p. 326 (see S&M p. 326- -333) 333): :
B = 2 ( B = 2 ( + 1) f + 1) f
m m
= 2 ( = 2 ( f + f f + f
m m
) Hz ) Hz
1886 1886- -1940 1940
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The normalized power normalized power within the Carson within the Carson s Rule bandwidth s Rule bandwidth
for a single tone angle modulated signals is: for a single tone angle modulated signals is:
Note that J Note that J
- -n n
( ( ) = ) = J J
n n
( ( ) so that ) so that J J
- -n n
2 2
( ( ) = J ) = J
n n
2 2
( ( ) and for the ) and for the
normalized power calculation the sign of J( normalized power calculation the sign of J( ) ) is not used. is not used.
( ) =

2 +1
2
C
in-band, sinusoid n
n = -(+1)
A
P J
2
S&M Eq. 6.75 S&M Eq. 6.75
Spectrum of
single tone FM
modulation
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analog FM power spectral density PSD of the voice The analog FM power spectral density PSD of the voice
signal has a bandwidth predicted only by Carson signal has a bandwidth predicted only by Carson s Rule s Rule
since it is not a single tone. since it is not a single tone.
PSD PSD
Voice Voice
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Here f Here f
max max
= 4 kHz, k = 25 Hz/V and = 4 kHz, k = 25 Hz/V and f f
max max
= 40(25) = 1 kHz. = 40(25) = 1 kHz.
The Carson The Carson s Rule approximate maximum bandwidth s Rule approximate maximum bandwidth
B = 2 ( B = 2 ( f + f f + f
m m
) = 10 kHz or ) = 10 kHz or 5 kHz (but seems wrong!) 5 kHz (but seems wrong!)
PSD PSD
Voice Voice
40
Bandwidth
f
C
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
A 200 Hz A 200 Hz single tone single tone FM signal has a PSD with periodic FM signal has a PSD with periodic
terms at f terms at f
C C
n f n f
m m
= 25 = 25 0.2 n kHz. 0.2 n kHz.
PSD PSD
f
C
200 Hz 200 Hz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Here f Here f
m m
= 200 Hz, k = 25 Hz/V and = 200 Hz, k = 25 Hz/V and f f
max max
= 40(25) = 1 = 40(25) = 1
kHz. The Carson kHz. The Carson s Rule approximate maximum bandwidth s Rule approximate maximum bandwidth
B = 2 ( B = 2 ( f + f f + f
m m
) = 2.4 kHz or ) = 2.4 kHz or 1.2 kHz: 1.2 kHz:
PSD PSD
f
C
200 Hz 200 Hz
Bandwidth Bandwidth
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Since Since = = f / f f / f
m m
= 1 kHz / 0.2 kHz = 5 and the Bessel = 1 kHz / 0.2 kHz = 5 and the Bessel
function predicts a bandwidth of 2 n f function predicts a bandwidth of 2 n f
m m
= 2(12)(200) = = 2(12)(200) =
4.8 kHz (since n = 12 for 4.8 kHz (since n = 12 for = 5 from Table 6.1): = 5 from Table 6.1):
PSD PSD
f
C
200 Hz 200 Hz
Bandwidth Bandwidth
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
Noise in FM and PM Systems Noise in FM and PM Systems
Pages 347 Pages 347- -355 355
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
A general angle modulated transmitted signal, where A general angle modulated transmitted signal, where (t) (t)
is the instantaneous phase, is the instantaneous phase, is: is:
s s
angle angle- -modulated modulated
(t (t) = A ) = A
C C
cos cos [ [ (t (t)] )] S&M Eq. 6.86 S&M Eq. 6.86
The received signals is: The received signals is:
r r
angle angle- -modulated modulated
(t (t) = ) = A A
C C
cos cos [ [ (t)] + (t)] + n(t n(t) S&M Eq. 6.87 ) S&M Eq. 6.87
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for PM is: The analytical signal for PM is:
s s
PM PM
(t (t) = A ) = A
C C
cos cos [ [ (t)] (t)] = A A
C C
cos cos [2 [2 f f
C C
t t + + s(t s(t)] )]
S&M Eq. 6.53 S&M Eq. 6.53
After development the SNR for demodulated PM is: After development the SNR for demodulated PM is:
SNR SNR
PM PM
= ( = ( A A
C C
) )
2 2
P P
S S
/ (2 N / (2 N
o o
f f
max max
) ) S&M Eq. 6.98 S&M Eq. 6.98
where where < < s(t s(t) ) for all t. for all t.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The analytical signal for FM is: The analytical signal for FM is:
s s
FM FM
(t (t) = A ) = A
C C
cos cos [ [ (t)] (t)] = A A
C C
cos cos [2 [2 f f
C C
t t + + k s( k s( ) d ) d ] ]
S&M Eq. 6.53 S&M Eq. 6.53
After development the SNR for demodulated FM is: After development the SNR for demodulated FM is:
SNR SNR
FM FM
= 1.5 (k = 1.5 (k A A
C C
/(2 /(2 ) ) ) )
2 2
P P
S S
/ (N / (N
o o
f f
max max
3 3
) ) S&M Eq. 6.98 S&M Eq. 6.98
where k where k s(t s(t) ) f f
C C
for all t. for all t.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
End of Chapter 6
End of Chapter 6
Analog Modulation
Analog Modulation
and Demodulation
and Demodulation
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Multiplexing Techniques
Multiplexing Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Multiplexing Techniques
Multiplexing Techniques
Time Division Multiplexing Time Division Multiplexing
Pages 364 Pages 364- -368 368
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Time division multiplexing Time division multiplexing (TDM) combines several low, (TDM) combines several low,
fixed and predefined bit rate sources into a single high fixed and predefined bit rate sources into a single high
speed bit stream for transmission over a single digital speed bit stream for transmission over a single digital
communication channel: communication channel:
Demultiplexer Demultiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer
Time slots Time slots
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
The The TDM time slots have to be chosen properly. If the time TDM time slots have to be chosen properly. If the time
slots are too small (for example, 1 bit) then the multiplexer slots are too small (for example, 1 bit) then the multiplexer
and demultiplexer must switch rapidly. If the time slots are and demultiplexer must switch rapidly. If the time slots are
too large (for example, 64 Kb) then the data must be too large (for example, 64 Kb) then the data must be
buffered buffered and and delay delay would be produced. TDM is used for would be produced. TDM is used for
baseband ( baseband (not not bandpass) data transmission. bandpass) data transmission.
Demultiplexer Demultiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer
Time slots Time slots
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
The T1 TDM system for telephone networks uses a 193 bit The T1 TDM system for telephone networks uses a 193 bit
frame frame where each frame has 24 8 where each frame has 24 8- -bit bit slots slots and 1 and 1- -bit in each bit in each
frame for signaling. The T1 bit rate r frame for signaling. The T1 bit rate r
b b
= 1.544 Mb/sec. = 1.544 Mb/sec.
The duration of each frame T The duration of each frame T
f f
= 193 b / 1.544 Mb/sec = = 193 b / 1.544 Mb/sec =
125 125 sec or 8 k samples/sec. Here all the data sources sec or 8 k samples/sec. Here all the data sources
have the same data rate. have the same data rate.
S&M Figure 7 S&M Figure 7- -3 3
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
If the data sources have different rates a If the data sources have different rates a multiplexer multiplexer
scheme scheme must reconcile the disparate rates. must reconcile the disparate rates.
The data rates are in the lowest possible ratio of 8:16:24 or The data rates are in the lowest possible ratio of 8:16:24 or
1:2:3 for a total of 1 + 2 + 3 = 6 slots. The slots are 1:2:3 for a total of 1 + 2 + 3 = 6 slots. The slots are
apportioned to the channels as: apportioned to the channels as: a b b c c c a b b c c c and the channel and the channel
data rate is 48 kb/sec. data rate is 48 kb/sec.
Another example is data rates of 10, 15, 20, and 30 Kb/sec Another example is data rates of 10, 15, 20, and 30 Kb/sec
which reduces to 2:3:4:6 (the LCD is 5) for 2 + 3 + 4 + 6 = which reduces to 2:3:4:6 (the LCD is 5) for 2 + 3 + 4 + 6 =
15 slots 15 slots and the channel data rate is and the channel data rate is 45 kb/sec. 45 kb/sec.
S&M Figure 7 S&M Figure 7- -4 4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
If data arrives If data arrives asynchronously asynchronously from variable rate sources, a from variable rate sources, a
statistical multiplexer statistical multiplexer with input buffers is used. The design with input buffers is used. The design
is performed by observation and tested in simulation. is performed by observation and tested in simulation.
S&M Figure 7 S&M Figure 7- -5 5
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
The statistical TDM packet consists of a The statistical TDM packet consists of a start flag start flag, , address address
field field, , control field control field, , information bits information bits, , error control, error control, and an and an end end
flag. flag.
S&M Figure 7 S&M Figure 7- -6 6
TCP/IP data packet TCP/IP data packet
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
TDM with four equal data rate sources r TDM with four equal data rate sources r
b b
= 250 b/sec and a = 250 b/sec and a
transmission rate transmission rate r r
TDM TDM
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
0110
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
TDM with unequal data rate sources r TDM with unequal data rate sources r
b b
= 250, 250 and 500 = 250, 250 and 500
b/sec and a transmission rate b/sec and a transmission rate r r
TDM TDM
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
r r
b b
= 500 b/sec (input) = 500 b/sec (input)
r
TDM
= 1 kb/sec
r r
b b
= 500 b/sec (output) = 500 b/sec (output)
1 msec delay 1 msec delay
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Multiplexing Techniques
Multiplexing Techniques
Frequency Division Multiplexing Frequency Division Multiplexing
Pages 368 Pages 368- -370 370
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Frequency division multiplexing Frequency division multiplexing (FDM) divides the total (FDM) divides the total
bandwidth available to the system into bandwidth available to the system into non non- -overlapping overlapping
frequency sub frequency sub- -bands for transmission over a single digital bands for transmission over a single digital
communication channel. communication channel.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
FDM usually utilizes FDM usually utilizes guard bands guard bands to separate the digital to separate the digital
data transmissions. FDM is used for bandpass ( data transmissions. FDM is used for bandpass (not not
baseband) data transmission baseband) data transmission
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
FDM for FDM for FM broadcasting FM broadcasting over a cable system: over a cable system:
S&M
Figure 7-7a
WXTU WXTU
WQAN
Scranton
WPTS
Pittsburgh
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
FDM employs a common shared bandwidth but here with FDM employs a common shared bandwidth but here with
no apparent guard bands. no apparent guard bands.
S&M Figure 7 S&M Figure 7- -7b 7b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
Optical FDM is usually called Optical FDM is usually called wavelength division wavelength division
multiplexing multiplexing (WDM) and utilizes separate wavelengths (WDM) and utilizes separate wavelengths
( ( ) ) of light. of light.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
TDM is used for baseband and FDM for bandpass data TDM is used for baseband and FDM for bandpass data
transmission. FDM requires the assignment and transmission. FDM requires the assignment and
coordination of carrier frequencies which can be coordination of carrier frequencies which can be
problematic. problematic. Code division multiple access Code division multiple access (CDMA) utilizes (CDMA) utilizes
spread spectrum modulation over the same frequency spread spectrum modulation over the same frequency
band. CDMA is considered in EE4542 Telecommunications band. CDMA is considered in EE4542 Telecommunications
Engineering. Engineering.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
FDM PSD with three equal data rate sources r FDM PSD with three equal data rate sources r
b b
= 1 kb/sec = 1 kb/sec
and three carrier frequencies of 15.5, 20 and 24.5 kHz. and three carrier frequencies of 15.5, 20 and 24.5 kHz.
BASK (OOK) BASK (OOK)
BFSK (MFSK) BFSK (MFSK)
BPSK BPSK
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 7
End of Chapter 7
End of Chapter 7
Multiplexing Techniques
Multiplexing Techniques
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital to Analog
Digital to Analog
Conversion
Conversion
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Sampling and Quantization Sampling and Quantization
Pages 390 Pages 390- -391 391
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Traditional Traditional analog transmission analog transmission (AM, FM and PM) are less (AM, FM and PM) are less
complex than digital data transmission have been the basis complex than digital data transmission have been the basis
of broadcasting and communication for 100 years. of broadcasting and communication for 100 years.
Analog television signal Analog television spectrum
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -1a 1a
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Digital data transmission Digital data transmission (PAM, ASK, PSK, FSK and QAM) (PAM, ASK, PSK, FSK and QAM)
is more complex but (perhaps) offers higher performance is more complex but (perhaps) offers higher performance
with control of accuracy and easier storage, simpler signal with control of accuracy and easier storage, simpler signal
processing for noise reduction, error detection and processing for noise reduction, error detection and
correction and encryption. correction and encryption.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -1b 1b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Digital data transmission requires analog Digital data transmission requires analog- -to to- -digital (ADC) digital (ADC)
and digital and digital- -to to- -analog (DAC) converters. The ADC process analog (DAC) converters. The ADC process
utilizes sampling and quantization of the continuous analog utilizes sampling and quantization of the continuous analog
signal. signal.
ADC ADC
DAC DAC
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -1b 1b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
ADC sampling occurs at a uniform rate (the ADC sampling occurs at a uniform rate (the sampling rate sampling rate) )
and has a continuous amplitude. and has a continuous amplitude.
Continuous
amplitude
Uniform
sampling
rate
Analog signal
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -2a,b 2a,b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The continuous amplitude sample is then quantized to The continuous amplitude sample is then quantized to n n
bits or resolution for the bits or resolution for the full scale full scale input or input or 2 2
n n
levels levels. .
Continuous
amplitude
Uniform
sampling
rate
Quantized
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -2b,c 2b,c
Quantized
amplitude
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Here n = Here n = 4 and there are 2 4 and there are 2
4 4
= 16 = 16 levels for a full scale input levels for a full scale input
of 2 V ( of 2 V ( 1 V). The 1 V). The step size step size = 2 V / 16 = 0.125 V and the = 2 V / 16 = 0.125 V and the
quantized value quantized value
is the is the midpoint midpoint
of the of the voltage voltage
range range. .
S&M Table 8.1 S&M Table 8.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Sampling Baseband Sampling Baseband
Analog Signals Analog Signals
Pages 392 Pages 392- -399 399
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The analog signal The analog signal x(t x(t) which is continuously, uniformly ) which is continuously, uniformly
sampled is represented by: sampled is represented by:
Multiplication in the temporal domain is convolution in the Multiplication in the temporal domain is convolution in the
frequency domain and the frequency domain representation frequency domain and the frequency domain representation
is: is:

=
s
k =
x (t) x(t) (t k )
S
T
S&M Eq. 8.1 S&M Eq. 8.1


=
`
)

=
`
)
=

s
k =
s
k =
s
k =
X (f) X(f) (t k )
X (f) X(f) (f k )
X (f) X(f k )
S
S S
S S
T
f f
f f
F
S&M Eq. 8.2 S&M Eq. 8.2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Temporal and spectral representation of the continuous Temporal and spectral representation of the continuous
sampling process for a sum of three sinusoids. sampling process for a sum of three sinusoids.

k =
(t k )
S
T

=
s
k =
x (t) x(t) (t k )
S
T

=
s
k =
X (f) X(f k )
S S
f f

k =
(f k )
S
f
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -3 3
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
2 V, 20 2 V, 20 initial initial
phase, phase, 500 Hz 500 Hz
sinusoid sinusoid
sampled at sampled at
5 k samples/sec 5 k samples/sec
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -4a,b 4a,b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Aliased samples Aliased samples
can be can be
reconstructed reconstructed
for a 4500 Hz for a 4500 Hz
and a 5500 Hz and a 5500 Hz
sinusoid that sinusoid that
appears to be appears to be
a 500 Hz a 500 Hz
sinusoid sinusoid
S&M S&M
Figure 8 Figure 8- -4a,c,d 4a,c,d
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The aliasing aliasing of of
the signal can the signal can
be predicted by be predicted by
the magnitude the magnitude
spectrum of the spectrum of the
original 500 Hz original 500 Hz
sampled signal. sampled signal.
If the 4500 Hz If the 4500 Hz
and 5500 Hz and 5500 Hz
signals are then signals are then
sampled at sampled at
5 k samples/sec 5 k samples/sec
aliasing at occurs at | 4500 aliasing at occurs at | 4500 5000 | and (5500 5000 | and (5500 5000) Hz 5000) Hz
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -4a,b 4a,b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The sum of The sum of
three sinusoids three sinusoids
does not have does not have
any aliased any aliased
frequencies frequencies
since the since the
sampling sampling
frequency frequency f f
S S
is greater than is greater than
twice the twice the
highest highest
frequency frequency f f
max max
f f
S S
> 2 > 2 f f
max max
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -4a,c 4a,c
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -5 5
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The frequency The frequency
2 2 f f
max max
is called is called
the the Nyquist Nyquist
frequency frequency. .
Harry Nyquist, Harry Nyquist,
who contributed who contributed
to the understanding of thermal noise to the understanding of thermal noise
while at Bell Labs, is also remembered while at Bell Labs, is also remembered
in electrotechnology for his analysis of in electrotechnology for his analysis of
sampled data signals. sampled data signals.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -4a 4a
Harry Nyquist Harry Nyquist
1889 1889- -1976 1976
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The analog signal is The analog signal is reconstructed reconstructed from the quantized from the quantized
samples by a DAC and a low pass filter (LFP). samples by a DAC and a low pass filter (LFP).
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -6 6
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
For For practical signals practical signals f f
S S
> 2 > 2 f f
max max
using a using a guard band guard band for for LPFs LPFs
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -7 7
f f
S S
= 2 = 2 f f
max max
f f
S S
> 2 > 2 f f
max max
guard band guard band
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
With With out out- -of of- -band noise band noise and sample signals, aliases of the and sample signals, aliases of the
noise now appear noise now appear in in- -band band and should be filtered before the and should be filtered before the
sampling process. sampling process.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -8 8
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Sampling Baseband Sampling Baseband
Analog Signals Analog Signals
Pages 149 Pages 149- -182 182
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The periodic baseband The periodic baseband
signal consisting of signal consisting of
three sinusoids is three sinusoids is
impulse sampled impulse sampled, ,
sampled sampled- -and and- -held held, ,
processed by an processed by an
8 8- -bit ADC bit ADC- -DAC DAC
and a and a quantizer quantizer
in in Simulink Simulink. .
MS Figure 4.1 MS Figure 4.1
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The periodic baseband signal is the sum of a 1 V 500 Hz, a The periodic baseband signal is the sum of a 1 V 500 Hz, a
0.5 V 1.5 kHz and a 0.2 V 2.5 kHz sinusoid. 0.5 V 1.5 kHz and a 0.2 V 2.5 kHz sinusoid.
MS Figure 4.2 MS Figure 4.2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The power spectral density (PSD) of the periodic baseband The power spectral density (PSD) of the periodic baseband
signal has the expected peaks at 0.5, 1.5 and 2.5 kHz. signal has the expected peaks at 0.5, 1.5 and 2.5 kHz.
MS Figure 4.3 MS Figure 4.3 Three sinusoids Three sinusoids
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The periodic baseband signal is overlaid with the continuous The periodic baseband signal is overlaid with the continuous
amplitude sample amplitude sample- -and and- -hold signal with hold signal with f f
S S
= 8 kHz. = 8 kHz.
MS Figure 4.4 MS Figure 4.4
0.125 msec 0.125 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The analog signal The analog signal x(t x(t) here is sampled and held rather than ) here is sampled and held rather than
impulse sampled: impulse sampled:
The power spectral density (PSD The power spectral density (PSD
s s- -h h
) of the sample and hold ) of the sample and hold
operation is: operation is:
= =
=
s-h
n
y (t) x(n ) h(t n ) h(t) 1 0 t
h(t) 0
S S S
T T T
otherwise
MS Eq. 4.3 MS Eq. 4.3
( )
( )

=
=

2 2 2 2
s-h S
k =
2 2
s-h
k =
PSD | X(f k ) | T sinc 2 f
PSD | X(f k ) | sinc 2 f

S S S
S S
f f T
f T
MS Eq. 4.4 MS Eq. 4.4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
However, if the analog signal However, if the analog signal x(t x(t) is impulse sampled: ) is impulse sampled:
Then the power spectral density (PSD) does not have a Then the power spectral density (PSD) does not have a
sinc sinc
2 2
term: term:
The PSD The PSD
s s- -h h
does have the sinc does have the sinc
2 2
term: term:
MS Eq. 4.1 MS Eq. 4.1
( )

=
=

2 2
k =
2 2
s-h
k =
PSD | X(f k ) |
PSD | X(f k ) | sinc 2 f
S S
S S
f f
f T
MS Eq. 4.4 MS Eq. 4.4
=

n
x(n ) x(t) (t n )
S S
T T
MS Eq. 4.2 MS Eq. 4.2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The PSD of the impulse sampled sum of three sinusoid The PSD of the impulse sampled sum of three sinusoid
signal with signal with f f
S S
= 8 kHz is: = 8 kHz is:
MS Figure 4.5 MS Figure 4.5 8 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz 16 kHz
No sinc No sinc
2 2
term term

2 2
k =
PSD | X(f k ) |
S S
f f
MS Eq. 4.2 MS Eq. 4.2
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The PSD of the continuous amplitude sample and hold The PSD of the continuous amplitude sample and hold
sum of three sinusoid signal with sum of three sinusoid signal with f f
S S
= 8 kHz is: = 8 kHz is:
MS Figure 4.6 MS Figure 4.6 8 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz 16 kHz
sinc sinc
2 2
term term
( )
( )

=
=

2 2 2 2
s-h
k =
2 2
s-h
k =
PSD | X(f k ) | sinc 2 f
PSD | X(f k ) | sinc 2 f

S S S S
S S
f f T T
f T
MS Eq. 4.4 MS Eq. 4.4
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Sampling Bandpass Sampling Bandpass
Analog Signals Analog Signals
Pages 399 Pages 399- -400 400
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
A bandpass signal does not need to be sampled at 2 A bandpass signal does not need to be sampled at 2 f f
2 2
. .
Nyquist Nyquist s bandpass sampling theory states that the s bandpass sampling theory states that the
sampling rate sampling rate f f
S S
> 2( > 2(f f
2 2
f f
1 1
) which is substantially less than ) which is substantially less than
2 2 f f
2 2
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -9 9
f f
1 1
f f
2 2
f f
S S
= 20 ksamples/sec = 20 ksamples/sec
f f
S S
= 7 ksamples/sec = 7 ksamples/sec
LPF 10 kHz LPF 10 kHz
BPF 8 BPF 8- -10 kHz 10 kHz
8 10 kHz 8 10 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Sampling Bandpass Sampling Bandpass
Analog Signals Analog Signals
Pages 180 Pages 180- -181 181
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The Simulink Simulink simulation uses the DSB AM modulation simulation uses the DSB AM modulation
block and the sum of three sinusoids source. block and the sum of three sinusoids source.
MS Figure 4 MS Figure 4- -32 32
MS Figure 4 MS Figure 4- -33 33
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The Simulink Simulink simulation initially uses a sampling rate of simulation initially uses a sampling rate of
5 MHz and results in 4 194 304 = 2 5 MHz and results in 4 194 304 = 2
22 22
sampling points. The sampling points. The
PSD shows the DSB PSD shows the DSB- -LC AM signal with the LSB and USB. LC AM signal with the LSB and USB.
MS Figure 4 MS Figure 4- -33 33
LSB USB LSB USB
f f
C C
Scaled PSD Scaled PSD f f
max max
= 50 kHz = 50 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The bandwidth of the bandpass signal is The bandwidth of the bandpass signal is f f
2 2
f f
1 1
= 22.5 = 22.5
17.5 = 5 kHz and the 17.5 = 5 kHz and the Simulink Simulink sampling rate is set to sampling rate is set to
50 kHz 50 kHz and results in only 32 768 = 2 and results in only 32 768 = 2
15 15
sampling points. sampling points.
MS Figure 4 MS Figure 4- -34 34
LSB USB LSB USB
f f
C C
Scaled PSD Scaled PSD f f
max max
= 50 kHz = 50 kHz
Aliased frequency range > 25 kHz Aliased frequency range > 25 kHz
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Quantizing Process: Quantizing Process:
Uniform Quantization Uniform Quantization
Pages 400 Pages 400- -404 404
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The quantizing process quantizing process divides the divides the range range ( ( full scale) into full scale) into
2 2
n n
(n = 4 here) regions which are assigned an n (n = 4 here) regions which are assigned an n- -bit binary bit binary
code. code.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -10 10
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The error error associated with the quantizing process is associated with the quantizing process is
assumed to have a uniform probability density function. assumed to have a uniform probability density function.
The maximum error for uniform quantization is: The maximum error for uniform quantization is:
The quantizer range is The quantizer range is V V
max max
and the uniform quantizer and the uniform quantizer
voltage step size is: voltage step size is:
The mean square quantizing E The mean square quantizing E
q q
is the normalized is the normalized
quantizing noise power: quantizing noise power:
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -11 11
| |
= =
|
\ .
max max
n n
2 V V
q 0.5
2 2
= =
max max
n n-1
2 V V
2 2
( )
( )
/ 2
/ 2

= = = =

2 2 2
2
max max
q
2
2n
n
V V 1
E q dq
12
3 2
3 2
MS Eq. 4.7 MS Eq. 4.7
MS Eq. 4.6 MS Eq. 4.6
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The signal to quantizing noise power signal to quantizing noise power (SNR (SNR
q q
) is: ) is:
P P
S S
is the normalized power of the signal that is quantized. is the normalized power of the signal that is quantized.
For the ADC here For the ADC here = 10 mV and n = 8. The sum of three = 10 mV and n = 8. The sum of three
sinusoids as the input signal has a peak amplitude of 1.1 V sinusoids as the input signal has a peak amplitude of 1.1 V
and the quantizing noise has a peak amplitude of 10 mV. and the quantizing noise has a peak amplitude of 10 mV.
MS Figure 4.7 MS Figure 4.7
MS Eq. 4.8 MS Eq. 4.8
( )
= =
2n
S S
q
2 2
max
12 P P
SNR 3 2
V
10 mV 10 mV
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Quantizing Process: Quantizing Process:
Nonuniform Quantization Nonuniform Quantization
Pages 400 Pages 400- -404 404
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Nonuniform quantization divides the dynamic range of an Nonuniform quantization divides the dynamic range of an
analog signal into nonuniform quantization regions. Lower analog signal into nonuniform quantization regions. Lower
magnitudes have smaller quantization regions than high magnitudes have smaller quantization regions than high
magnitudes. magnitudes.
The quantization of speech benefits from nonuniform The quantization of speech benefits from nonuniform
quantization since the perception of hearing is quantization since the perception of hearing is logarithmical logarithmical
rather than linear. rather than linear.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Uniform Uniform
quantization quantization
(top) results in (top) results in
a large amount a large amount
of error for of error for
small sample small sample
amplitude. amplitude.
Non Non- -uniform uniform
quantization quantization
(bottom) (bottom)
reduces the reduces the
error for small error for small
sample sample
amplitudes. amplitudes.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -13 13
Uniform quantization Uniform quantization
Nonuniform quantization Nonuniform quantization
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Uniform quantization is simpler to implement so a Uniform quantization is simpler to implement so a
compressor compressor (a non (a non- -linear transfer function) is used before linear transfer function) is used before
the quantizer. the quantizer.
The The - -Law Law
compressor compressor
is used in is used in
telephony telephony
with MS Eq. 4.9 with MS Eq. 4.9
= 255. At the receiver = 255. At the receiver
an expander has the an expander has the
inverse non inverse non- -linear linear
transfer function and transfer function and
results in results in companding companding
( (COMpressing COMpressing and and
exPANDING exPANDING). ).
( )
| |
|
|
\ .

in
max
in
out max
max
V
ln 1+
V
V
V = V 0 1
ln 1+ V
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Companding Companding
Pages 157 Pages 157- -159 159
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The - -Law compander concept can be simulated in Law compander concept can be simulated in
Simulink Simulink with the with the - -Law Compressor and Law Compressor and - -Law Expander Law Expander
blocks. The A blocks. The A- -Law Compressor and A Law Compressor and A- -Law Expander Law Expander
blocks are included for comparison. blocks are included for comparison.
MS Figure 4.13 MS Figure 4.13
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The - -Law compressor voltage transfer function is Law compressor voltage transfer function is
sigmoidal sigmoidal (S (S- -shaped). shaped).
MS Figure 4.14 MS Figure 4.14
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation
Pages 171 Pages 171- -175 175
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The pulse code modulator (PCM) transmitter utilizes a pulse code modulator (PCM) transmitter utilizes a
Simulink Simulink - -Law compressor block, an 8 Law compressor block, an 8- -bit ADC subsystem, bit ADC subsystem,
an 8 an 8- -bit DAC subsystem and a bit DAC subsystem and a - -Law expander block. Law expander block.
MS Figure 4.21 MS Figure 4.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The The Simulink Simulink 8 8- -bit ADC subsystem has a sample bit ADC subsystem has a sample- -and and- -hold hold
block controlled by a block controlled by a sampling sampling pulse generator, an 8 pulse generator, an 8- -bit bit
encoder block, an integer encoder block, an integer- -to to- -bit converter block which bit converter block which
provides an 8 provides an 8- -bit bit vector vector to a demultiplexer block and a to a demultiplexer block and a
multiport switch. multiport switch. An 8 An 8- -level level staircase staircase subsystem subsystem
sequences the multiport switch to select 1 of the 8 inputs for sequences the multiport switch to select 1 of the 8 inputs for
bit serial output. bit serial output.
MS Figure 4.22 MS Figure 4.22
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The 8 The 8- -level level staircase Simulink staircase Simulink subsystem sequences the subsystem sequences the
multiport switch with a 3 multiport switch with a 3- -bit counter and a 3 bit counter and a 3- -bit DAC for the bit DAC for the
output. output.
MS Figure 4.22 MS Figure 4.22
3 3- -bit DAC bit DAC
3 3- -bit counter bit counter
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The 8 The 8- -bit DAC bit DAC Simulink Simulink subsystem for the PCM system subsystem for the PCM system
uses a 8 uses a 8- -bit bit shift register shift register and an 8 and an 8- -bit DAC. bit DAC.
MS Figure 4.24 MS Figure 4.24
8 8- -bit DAC bit DAC
8 8- -bit shift bit shift
register register
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
The 8 The 8- -bit DAC bit DAC Simulink Simulink subsystem for the PCM system subsystem for the PCM system
uses a 8 uses a 8- -bit bit shift register shift register and an 8 and an 8- -bit DAC. bit DAC.
MS Figure 4.24 MS Figure 4.24
8 8- -bit DAC bit DAC
8 8- -bit shift bit shift
register register
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Analog input signal to the PCM system Analog input signal to the PCM system
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25
MS Figure 4.21 MS Figure 4.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
8 8- -bit DAC output after 8 bit DAC output after 8- -bit ADC and bit ADC and - -Law Compressor Law Compressor
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25
MS Figure 4.21 MS Figure 4.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
- -Law Expander block Law Expander block output of the PCM system output of the PCM system
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25
MS Figure 4.21 MS Figure 4.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
LPF LPF output of the PCM system output of the PCM system
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25
MS Figure 4.21 MS Figure 4.21
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Analog input signal to the PCM system Analog input signal to the PCM system
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25 LPF output of the PCM system LPF output of the PCM system
startup startup
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Differential Pulse Code Differential Pulse Code
Modulation Modulation
Pages 407 Pages 407- -411 411
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Sampled speech data are Sampled speech data are highly correlated highly correlated and and differential differential
pulse code modulation pulse code modulation (DPCM) exploits this to lower the (DPCM) exploits this to lower the
overall data overall data
rate. rate.
DPCM DPCM
uses a uses a
predictor predictor
to subtract to subtract
a predicted a predicted
value from value from
the input. the input.
The The error error
difference difference
is sent. is sent.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -15 15
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The predictor is a recursive equation, for example: The predictor is a recursive equation, for example:
S S(n (n) = 0.75 s(n ) = 0.75 s(n 1) + 0.2 s(n 1) + 0.2 s(n 2) +0.05 s(n 2) +0.05 s(n 3) 3)
where where S S(n (n) )
is the is the
predicted predicted
value of the value of the
n n th th sample sample
and and s(n s(n- -i) i)
is the is the n n- -i i th th
sample. sample.
The error The error
signal is signal is
s(n s(n) ) S S(n (n) )
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -15 15
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
A typical continuous analog signal is sampled and results in A typical continuous analog signal is sampled and results in
a discrete signal a discrete signal s(n s(n), The discrete predicted signal ), The discrete predicted signal S S(n (n) is ) is
recursively computed. The discrete error signal is recursively computed. The discrete error signal is
transmitted and has less quantizing bits than the actual transmitted and has less quantizing bits than the actual
discrete signal. discrete signal.
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -16b 16b
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
A DPCM example of actual discrete values, predicted A DPCM example of actual discrete values, predicted
values and the error terms: values and the error terms:
S&M Table 8 S&M Table 8- -3 3
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Differential Pulse Code Differential Pulse Code
Modulation Modulation
Pages 175 Pages 175- -180 180
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
A 4 A 4- -bit first order bit first order differential pulse code modulator differential pulse code modulator (DPCM) (DPCM)
can be simulated in can be simulated in Simulink. Simulink.
MS Figure 4.26 MS Figure 4.26
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The first order linear predictor MetaSystem determines the The first order linear predictor MetaSystem determines the
error signal: error signal: e(n e(n) = s(n+1) ) = s(n+1) 2 2 s(n s(n) + s(n ) + s(n- -1) 1)
MS Figure 4.27 MS Figure 4.27
error signal error signal
input input
ADC conversion command ADC conversion command
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The Simulink Simulink 4 4- -bit ADC subsystem of the DPCM system is bit ADC subsystem of the DPCM system is
similar to the 8 similar to the 8- -bit ADC of the PCM system and illustrates bit ADC of the PCM system and illustrates
design reuse. design reuse.
MS Figure 4.28 MS Figure 4.28
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The The Simulink Simulink 4 4- -bit DAC subsystem of the DPCM system is bit DAC subsystem of the DPCM system is
also similar to the 8 also similar to the 8- -bit DAC of the PCM system and bit DAC of the PCM system and
again illustrates again illustrates design reuse. design reuse.
MS Figure 4.29 MS Figure 4.29 4 4- -bit DAC bit DAC
4 4- -bit shift bit shift
register register
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The first order linear predictor The first order linear predictor Simulink Simulink subsystem subsystem
reconstructs an estimate of the signal reconstructs an estimate of the signal s s
e e
(n (n) from the error ) from the error
signal signal e(n e(n) received and past estimates: ) received and past estimates:
s s
e e
(n+1) = e(n+1) + 2 (n+1) = e(n+1) + 2 s s
e e
(n (n) ) s s
e e
(n (n 1) 1)
MS Figure 4.30 MS Figure 4.30
reconstructed reconstructed
signal signal
input input
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Analog in Analog input signal of the DPCM system put signal of the DPCM system
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Output of the 4 Output of the 4- -bit first order bit first order DPCM system DPCM system
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Analog input signal to the DPCM system Analog input signal to the DPCM system
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31 Output of the 4 Output of the 4- -bit first order DPCM system bit first order DPCM system
startup startup
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Output of the 8 Output of the 8- -bit PCM system bit PCM system
MS Figure 4.31 MS Figure 4.31 Output of the 4 Output of the 4- -bit first order DPCM system bit first order DPCM system
startup startup
startup startup
MS Figure 4.25 MS Figure 4.25
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Delta Modulation Delta Modulation
Pages 411 Pages 411- -415 415
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Delta modulation Delta modulation is an extreme example of DPCM is an extreme example of DPCM using using
1 1- -bit data representing bit data representing : :
S S(n (n) = ) = S S(n (n 1) + 1) + b b
i i
= 1 if = 1 if S S(n (n 1) 1) s(n s(n 1) 1)
S S(n (n) = ) = S S(n (n 1) 1) b b
i i
= 0 if = 0 if S S(n (n 1) > 1) > s(n s(n 1) 1)
S&M Eq. 8.10 S&M Eq. 8.10
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -18 18
DM transmitter DM transmitter
DM receiver DM receiver
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The reconstructed signal increments The reconstructed signal increments on each on each
transmitted bit. transmitted bit.
b b
i i
= 1 = 1 S S(n (n) = ) = S S(n (n 1) + 1) + b b
i i
= 0 = 0 S S(n (n) = ) = S S(n (n 1) 1)
S&M Figure 8 S&M Figure 8- -19 19 4 1s 4 0s 4 1s 4 0s
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion
Delta Modulation Delta Modulation
Pages 72 Pages 72- -75 75
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Delta modulation (DM) can be simulated in Delta modulation (DM) can be simulated in Simulink Simulink. The . The
DM receiver utilizes a sample and hold token as an DM receiver utilizes a sample and hold token as an
accumulator and the step size accumulator and the step size = 20 mV. = 20 mV.
MS Figure 2.61 MS Figure 2.61
DM transmitter DM transmitter DM receiver DM receiver
f = 2 Hz f = 2 Hz
A = 1 V A = 1 V
f f
S S
= 2 kHz = 2 kHz
T T
S S
= 0.5 msec = 0.5 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
DM can be subject to DM can be subject to slope overload slope overload which occurs when: which occurs when:
/ / T T
S S
< max | d < max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | SVU Eq. 2.61 modified | SVU Eq. 2.61 modified
Here the sinusoid has A = 1 but f = 10 Hz and: Here the sinusoid has A = 1 but f = 10 Hz and:
/ / T T
S S
= 20 mV / 0.5 msec = 40 < max | d = 20 mV / 0.5 msec = 40 < max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | = 80 | = 80
and slope overload occurs. and slope overload occurs.
MS Figure 2.63 MS Figure 2.63 sinusoidal sinusoidal
input signal input signal
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
Granular noise Granular noise occurs occurs in in DM because if the input DM because if the input m(t m(t) is ) is
constant the received signal constant the received signal oscillates oscillates by by because there because there
is no is no 0 0 possible. possible. Clocking Clocking occurs at the DM symbol interval occurs at the DM symbol interval
T T
S S
= 0.5 msec. = 0.5 msec.
MS Figure 2.64 MS Figure 2.64
= 20 mV = 20 mV
= = 20 mV 20 mV
T T
S S
= 0.5 msec = 0.5 msec
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
The tradeoff between slope overload and granular noise is The tradeoff between slope overload and granular noise is
that a large value of that a large value of (to avoid slope overload) would (to avoid slope overload) would
increase granular noise. A decrease in increase granular noise. A decrease in T T
s s
(again to avoid (again to avoid
slope overload) would increase the data rate slope overload) would increase the data rate r r
S S
. .
The step size The step size = 20 mV and = 20 mV and T T
S S
= 0.5 msec ( = 0.5 msec (r r
S S
= 2 kb/sec) = 2 kb/sec)
here. here.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
For a 10 Hz sinusoidal input signal to a DM: For a 10 Hz sinusoidal input signal to a DM:
m(t m(t) = sin (2 ) = sin (2 10t) 10t)
max | d max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | | = 20 = 20
If step size If step size = 20 mV and = 20 mV and T T
S S
= 0.5 msec then = 0.5 msec then
/ T / T
S S
= 40 < max | d = 40 < max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | = 20 | = 20 so so slope overload is slope overload is
predicted to occur predicted to occur. .
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
For the 10 Hz sinusoidal input signal to a DM For the 10 Hz sinusoidal input signal to a DM
m(t m(t) = sin (2 ) = sin (2 10t) 10t)
max | d max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | | = 20 = 20
and the step size remains and the step size remains = 20 mV but = 20 mV but T T
S S
= 0.25 m = 0.25 msec sec
then then / T / T
S S
= 80 > max | d = 80 > max | d m(t m(t) / ) / dt dt | and slope overload is | and slope overload is
mitigated but mitigated but r r
S S
= 4 kb/sec. = 4 kb/sec.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 6
In comparison, an 8 In comparison, an 8- -bit PCM system sampling a 10 Hz bit PCM system sampling a 10 Hz
sinusoid at a reasonable sampling rate of 500 Hz (50 sinusoid at a reasonable sampling rate of 500 Hz (50
sampling points/period) has sampling points/period) has r r
b b
= 8(500) = 4 kb/sec or = 8(500) = 4 kb/sec or r r
b b
= r = r
S S
but PCM is more complicated than DM. but PCM is more complicated than DM.
EE4512 Analog and Digital Communications Chapter 8
End of Chapter 8
End of Chapter 8
Analog
Analog
-
-
to
to
-
-
Digital and
Digital and
Digital
Digital
-
-
to
to
-
-
Analog
Analog
Conversion
Conversion

You might also like